Harman Kardon Stereo System AVR 445 User Manual

®
Designed to Entertain.  
AVR 445  
AUDIO/VIDEO RECEIVER  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
AVR 445  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
Í
Thank you for choosing Harman Kardon! With the  
purchase of a Harman Kardon® AVR 445, you are  
about to begin many years of listening enjoyment.  
The AVR 445 takes the “video” part of its name seri-  
ously. Along with two HDMI inputs and three 60MHz  
analog component video inputs, the AVR 445 converts  
composite and S-video to component for single video  
connections. The AVR 445 also provides A/V sync  
delay so that lip sync errors – commonly seen when  
digital video processing is used in a source, program  
or video display – are eliminated.  
All popular digital and matrix surround modes,  
including Dolby® Digital, Dolby Digital EX,  
Dolby Pro Logic® II, DTS®, DTS-ES® Discrete and  
Matrix, DTS Neo:6® and DTS 96/24®  
The AVR 445 has the most extensive range of audio  
and video processing, control and connectivity options  
ever offered by Harman Kardon, enabling it to provide  
the best possible audio and video reproduction with  
any type of source material. Teaming advanced pro-  
cessing circuitry with proprietary technologies such as  
EzSet/EQ, the AVR 445 seamlessly integrates every  
component in your entertainment system to deliver the  
best possible sound and images.  
Í
Í
Seven channels of high-current, ultrawide-band-  
width amplification with the surround back channels  
assignable to either main-room or remote-room use  
Two HDMIinputs and three assignable high-band-  
width analog component inputs for switching the  
latest high-definition video sources  
Thanks to a wide range of multizone options and a  
standard ZR 10 remote control, the AVR 445 makes  
it possible to watch and listen to a separate source in  
one room while the main home theater uses a differ-  
ent source. Using the assignable rear surround chan-  
nel amplifiers, you may create a basic remote listening  
zone without any additional equipment, or the unit’s  
multiroom outputs may be used to feed an optional,  
external power amplifier and volume control. For  
one-wire multiroom connectivity, the AVR 445 is  
A-BUS/READY®, requiring only a single Category 5/5e  
cable run and an optional remote module to power a  
pair of remote speakers while controlling volume and  
enabling full control over the program source and  
connected IR-controlled devices.  
Í
Í
Í
Converts composite and S-video sources to com-  
ponent video  
Some of the leading-edge features that are available  
with the AVR 445, such as HDMIswitching and  
XM Ready® operation, are new to even the most  
experienced home theater enthusiast. Although the  
power of the AVR 445 makes them easy to use, we  
strongly recommend that you take a few minutes to  
read this owner’s manual to familiarize yourself with  
how the full suite of AVR 445 features and capabilities  
are configured and used in day-to-day operation. This  
small investment of time will yield significant dividends  
in taking the maximum advantage of this new addition  
to your home theater system.  
EzSet/EQ for quick and accurate system setup and  
room correction  
®
Harman Kardon’s Logic 7 processing brings a new  
sense of reality to stereo and matrix surround  
sources  
Í
Dolby Virtual Speaker processing for use when less  
than a full 5.1 or 7.1 speaker complement is  
available  
Í
Í
Í
Dolby Headphone for spacious, open sound when  
using headphones  
Along with the latest advances in digital audio and  
video technology, Harman Kardon recognizes that  
some things remain constant, and in the case of the  
AVR 445 that is a requirement for audio power best  
served by our time-honored high-current, ultrawide-  
bandwidth amplifier design. The AVR 445’s seven-  
channel amplifier provides the power to reproduce the  
loudest crescendos or cinema sound effects while  
remaining virtually free from distortion or system noise.  
USB connectivity for audio playback with compatible  
computers and quick system upgrades  
If you have any questions about this product, its instal-  
lation or its operation, you may also access a wealth  
of information and assistance by visiting our Web site  
Full bass management for all inputs, including  
the analog direct inputs for high-resolution DVDs,  
DVD-Audio and SACDplayers, including Quad  
Crossover settings and individual settings for  
each input  
Description and Features  
The AVR 445 serves as the hub of your home enter-  
tainment system, providing a wide range of listening  
possibilities for almost any audio or video program  
source, whether it is the broadcast of a movie or  
sporting event in HDTV or a vintage mono or stereo  
recording. When playing digital audio sources, the  
AVR 445 decodes Dolby® Digital, Dolby Digital EX,  
DTS® and DTS-ES® data streams. Two-channel stereo  
and matrix surround sources benefit from all current  
Í
Í
Í
A/V sync delay adjustable for each video input  
delivers perfect lip sync with digital programs or  
video displays  
With a combination of state-of-the-art circuitry, digital  
technology and proven performance with an elegant  
design that is compatible with the latest source com-  
ponents and video displays, the AVR 445 represents  
the culmination of Harman Kardon’s fifty-plus-year  
history of delivering the finest sonic performance.  
Front-panel analog audio/video jacks may be used  
as either inputs or outputs for connection to the  
latest portable products or video game consoles  
Extensive multiroom options, including a standard  
ZR 10 remote, audio and video outputs to the  
remote zone, assignable rear channel amplifier  
channels and A-BUS/READY® capability for listening  
to a separate source in a remote zone  
®
Dolby Pro Logic® IIx modes and DTS Neo:6. The  
latest version of our proprietary Logic 7® process is  
on-board to create a wider, more enveloping sound  
field and more defined surround channel positioning,  
regardless of the type of source material. Additional  
audio playback options include a direct connection to  
compatible computer-based sources through a direct  
USB connection.  
INTRODUCTION 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INFORMATION  
Installation Location  
ence to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Important Safety Information  
Í
To ensure proper operation and to avoid the poten-  
tial for safety hazards, place the unit on a firm and  
level surface. When placing the unit on a shelf, be  
certain that the shelf and any mounting hardware  
can support the weight of the product.  
Verify Line Voltage Before Use  
Your AVR 445 has been designed for use with  
120-volt AC current. Connection to a line voltage  
other than that for which it is intended can create a  
safety and fire hazard and may damage the unit.  
Í
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Í
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
Í
Make certain that proper space is provided both  
above and below the unit for ventilation. If this prod-  
uct will be installed in a cabinet or other enclosed  
area, make certain that there is sufficient air move-  
ment within the cabinet. Under some circumstances,  
a fan may be required.  
receiver.  
Í
If you have any questions about the voltage requirements  
for your specific model, or about the line voltage in your  
area, contact your selling dealer before plugging the unit  
into a wall outlet.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Í
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV tech-  
nician for help.  
Í
Í
Do not place the unit directly on a carpeted  
surface.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,  
and (2) this device must accept interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Do Not Use Extension Cords  
To avoid safety hazards, use only the power cord  
attached to your unit. We do not recommend that  
extension cords be used with this product. As with all  
electrical devices, do not run power cords under rugs  
or carpets, or place heavy objects on them. Damaged  
power cords should be replaced immediately by an  
authorized service center with a cord meeting factory  
specifications.  
Avoid installation in extremely hot or cold locations,  
or in an area that is exposed to direct sunlight or  
heating equipment.  
Í
Í
Avoid moist or humid locations.  
Do not obstruct the ventilation slots on the top of  
the unit, or place objects directly over them.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications may cause this  
unit to fail to comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules  
and may void the user’s authority to operate the  
equipment.  
Í
Due to the weight of the AVR 445 and the heat  
generated by the amplifiers, there is the remote  
possibility that the rubber padding on the bottom  
of the unit’s feet may leave marks on certain wood  
or veneer materials. Use caution when placing the  
unit on soft woods or other materials that may be  
damaged by heat or heavy objects.  
Handle the AC Power Cord Gently  
When disconnecting the power cord from an AC out-  
let, always pull the plug; never pull the cord. If you do  
not intend to use the unit for any considerable length  
of time, disconnect the plug from the AC outlet.  
Unpacking  
The carton and shipping materials used to protect your  
new receiver during shipment were specially designed  
to cushion it from shock and vibration. We suggest  
that you save the carton and packing materials for  
use in shipping if you move, or should the unit ever  
need repair.  
Do Not Open the Cabinet  
Cleaning  
There are no user-serviceable components inside this  
product. Opening the cabinet may present a shock  
hazard, and any modification to the product will void  
your guarantee. If water or any metal object such as a  
paper clip, wire or a staple accidentally falls inside the  
unit, disconnect it from the AC power source immedi-  
ately, and consult an authorized service center.  
When the unit gets dirty, wipe it with a clean, soft, dry  
cloth. If necessary, wipe it with a soft cloth dampened  
with mild soapy water, then a fresh cloth with clean  
water. Wipe dry immediately with a dry cloth. NEVER  
use benzene, aerosol cleaners, thinner, alcohol or any  
other volatile cleaning agent. Do not use abrasive clean-  
ers, as they may damage the finish of metal parts. Avoid  
spraying insecticide near the unit.  
To minimize the size of the carton in storage, you may  
wish to flatten it. This is done by carefully slitting the  
tape seams on the bottom and collapsing the carton.  
Other cardboard inserts may be stored in the same  
manner. Packing materials that cannot be collapsed  
should be saved along with the carton in a plastic bag.  
CATV or Antenna Grounding  
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to  
this product, be certain that it is grounded so as to pro-  
vide some protection against voltage surges and static  
charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code,  
ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984, provides information with  
respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting  
structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna  
discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location  
of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding  
electrodes and requirements of the grounding  
electrode.  
Moving the Unit  
If you do not wish to save the packaging materials,  
please note that the carton and other sections of the  
shipping protection are recyclable. Please respect the  
environment and discard those materials at a local  
recycling center.  
Before moving the unit, be certain to disconnect any  
interconnection cords with other components, and  
make certain that you disconnect the unit from the  
AC outlet.  
Important Information for the User  
At this time, you should remove the protective plastic  
film from the front-panel lens. Leaving the film in place  
will affect the performance of your remote control.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC rules. The limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-  
ference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio-frequency energy  
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communication. However, there is no guarantee that  
harmful interference will not occur in a particular instal-  
lation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-  
NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER: This reminder  
is provided to call the CATV (cable TV) system  
installer’s attention to article 820-40 of the NEC that  
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in par-  
ticular, specifies that the cable ground shall be con-  
nected to the grounding system of the building, as  
close to the point of cable entry as possible.  
4 SAFETY INFORMATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS  
^
%
$
#
!
)
@
AVR 445  
DIGITAL  
PRO LOGIC IIx  
HEADPHONE  
VID 12  
VID 34  
DMP  
USB  
XMFMAM  
TAPE  
6CH  
57CH. STEREO  
DIRECT  
DSP  
SURR. OFF  
VIRTUAL SPEAKER  
HDMI  
CDMI  
DVD  
8CH  
B
C
E F  
H
H
A
D
G
I
M
J K L  
N
1
7
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
NOTE: To make it easier to follow the instructions that refer to this illustration, a larger copy may be downloaded from the Product Support section for this product at  
The following controls and indicators are available on the AVR 445’s front panel:  
1 Standby/On Switch  
7 Input Source Selector  
8 Tuning Mode Selector  
9 Front-Panel Door  
# Upper Display Line  
$ Lower Display Line  
% Surround Mode Indicators  
^ Remote Sensor Window  
2 Surround Mode Group Selector  
3 Surround Mode Selector  
4 Tuning Selector  
) Volume Control  
5 Tuner Band Selector  
6 Preset Station Selector  
! Input Indicators  
@ Speaker/Channel Input Indicators  
The following controls and jacks are located behind the front-panel door. To open the door, place the edge of a finger on the left or right edge of the panel and gently swing the  
door down toward you.  
A Main Power Switch  
B Headphone Jack  
C Tone Mode Button  
D Speaker Selector Button  
E Channel Adjust Selector  
F Digital Input Selector  
G Delay Adjust Selector  
H ‹/Buttons  
I Set Button  
J EzSet/EQ Microphone Jack  
K Optical 4 Digital Input  
L Coaxial 4 Digital Input  
M Input/Output Status Indicator  
N Video 4 Input/Output Jacks  
that the name of the desired surround mode category  
appears in the on-screen display and in the Lower  
Display Line $, press the Surround Mode  
Selector 3 to cycle through the individual modes  
available. For example, press this button to select Dolby  
modes, and then press the Surround Mode Selector  
3 to choose from the various mode options.  
options for the surround mode category selected.  
The specific modes will vary based on the number of  
speakers available, the surround mode category and  
whether the input source is digital or analog. For exam-  
ple, press the Surround Mode Group Selector 2  
to select a category such as Dolby or Logic 7, and  
then press this button to see the specific mode choices  
that are available. For more information on mode  
selection, see pages 24, 35 and 58.  
1 Standby/On Switch: When the Main Power  
A
Switch  
is “ON,” press this button to turn on the  
AVR 445; press it again to turn the unit off. Note that  
the illumination surrounding the switch will turn blue  
when the unit is on, or in the Multiroom mode.  
2 Surround Mode Group Selector: Press this but-  
ton to select the top-level group of surround modes.  
Each press of the button will select one of the sur-  
round mode categories. Once the button is pressed so  
3 Surround Mode Selector: Press this button  
to select from among the available surround mode  
FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS  
This button may also be used to switch between Stereo  
4 Tuning Selector: Press the left side of the button  
to tune lower-frequency stations and the right side of  
the button to tune higher-frequency stations. When  
the tuner is in the MANUAL/MONOmode,  
each tap of the Selector will increase or decrease the  
frequency by one increment. When the tuner receives  
a signal strong enough for adequate reception,  
MANUALTUNEDwill appear in the Lower  
Display Line $ and in the on-screen display. When  
the tuner is in the AUTO/STEREOmode,  
press the button once, and the tuner will scan for a  
station with acceptable signal strength. When the  
next higher- or lower-frequency station is tuned, the  
frequency scan will stop and the Lower Display Line  
$ and the on-screen display will indicate AUTO  
TUNED. When an FM stereo station is tuned, the  
display will read AUTOSTTUNED. See page  
39 for more information on using the tuner. When an  
XM Ready module is connected and activated, and  
when there is sufficient signal strength for the XM  
system to operate, pressing this button will also  
change the XM Radio channel.  
# Upper Display Line: Depending on the unit’s  
status, a variety of messages will appear here. In  
normal operation, this line will show the current input  
source and identify whether an analog or digital input  
is in use. When the tuner is selected as the input, this  
line will identify the station as AM or FM and show the  
frequency and preset number, if any.  
and Mono modes for FM radio reception. When weak  
reception is encountered, select the Manual/Mono  
tuning mode. Press and hold again to switch back to  
Stereo mode. (See pages 39 for more information on  
using the tuner.)  
When an optional XM Connect & Play module is con-  
nected and activated, and when there is sufficient sig-  
nal strength for the XM system to operate, this button  
has a different set of functions than when traditional  
AM or FM radio is in use. See page 39 for more infor-  
mation on XM Radio operation.  
When an XM Connect & Play module is connected  
and activated, and when there is sufficient signal  
strength for the XM system to operate, the XM chan-  
nel number and signal strength will appear here.  
$ Lower Display Line: Depending on the unit’s  
status, a variety of messages will appear here. In nor-  
mal operation, the current surround mode will appear  
on this line. When an XM Ready module is connected  
and activated, and when there is sufficient signal  
strength for the XM system to operate, a variety of  
messages and information, including the XM channel  
title name, the current artist and track title, the XM  
Radio channel category and, when available, local  
traffic and weather information, will appear here.  
9 Front-Panel Door: To open the door so that the  
front-panel jacks and controls behind this door may be  
accessed, gently pull the door down and toward you,  
using either upper corner of the door.  
) Volume Control: Turn this knob clockwise to  
increase the volume, counterclockwise to decrease the  
volume. If the AVR 445 is muted, adjusting the volume  
control will automatically release the unit from the  
silenced condition.  
% Surround Mode Indicators: One of these  
indicators will light to show the surround mode in  
use. Depending on the specific combination of input  
sources and surround mode selected, more than  
one indicator may light. (See page 36 for more  
information.)  
5 Tuner Band Selector: Pressing this button will  
automatically switch the AVR 445 to the Tuner mode.  
Pressing it again will select the AM or FM frequency  
band, or XM Radio. (See page 39 for more informa-  
tion on the tuner.)  
! Input Indicators: One of these indicators will light  
to identify the currently selected input. Note that the  
entire list will light briefly each time the unit is turned  
on, as a test.  
@ Speaker/Channel Input Indicators: These indi-  
cators are multipurpose, indicating both the speaker  
type selected for each channel and the incoming data-  
signal configuration. The left, center, right, right surround  
and left surround speaker indicators are composed of  
three boxes, while the subwoofer is indicated by one  
box. The center box lights when a “small” speaker is  
selected, and the two outer boxes light when “large”  
speakers are selected. When none of the boxes are  
lit for the center, surround or subwoofer channels, no  
speaker has been assigned that position. The letters  
inside each box display the active input channels. For  
standard analog inputs, only the L and R will light, indi-  
cating a stereo input. For a digital source, the indicators  
will light to display the channels being received at the  
digital input. When the letters flash, the digital input has  
been interrupted. (See page 38 for more information on  
the Channel Indicators.)  
6 Preset Station Selector: Press this button to  
scroll up or down through the list of stations that have  
been entered into the preset memory. (See page 39  
for more information on tuner programming.)  
^ Remote Sensor Window: The sensor behind  
this window receives infrared signals from the remote  
control. Aim the remote control at this area, and do not  
block or cover it unless an external remote sensor  
is installed.  
7 Input Source Selector: Press this button to  
change the input by scrolling up or down through the  
list of input sources.  
8 Tuning Mode Selector: Press this button to select  
Auto or Manual tuning. When the button is pressed so  
that AUTO/STEREOappears in the Upper  
Display Line #, the tuner will search for the next  
station with an acceptable signal when the Tuning  
Selector 4M  
π
is pressed. When the button is  
pressed so that MANUAL/MONOappears in the  
Upper Display Line #, each press of the Tuning  
Selector 4M  
π
will increase the frequency. (See  
page 39 for more information on using the tuner.)  
6 FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS  
B
C
E F  
H
H
A
D
G
I
M
J K L  
N
The following controls and jacks are located behind the front-panel door. To open the door, place the edge of a finger on the left or right edge of the panel and gently swing the  
door down toward you.  
A Main Power Switch: Press this switch to apply  
power to the AVR 445. When the switch is pressed  
in, the unit is placed in a Standby mode, as indicated  
by the amber illumination surrounding the Standby/On  
Switch 1. This button MUST be pressed in to  
operate the unit. To turn the unit off and prevent the  
use of the remote control, this switch should be  
pressed until it pops out from the front panel so that  
the word “OFF” may be read at the top of the switch.  
D Speaker Selector Button: Press this button  
to begin the process of manually configuring the  
AVR 445 for the type of speakers it is being used  
with. For complete information on configuring the  
speaker settings, see page 29.  
L Coaxial 4 Digital Input: Connect the coaxial  
digital output of a digital audio product such as a  
portable audio player or video game to this jack.  
M Input/Output Status Indicator: This LED  
indicator will normally light green to show that the front-  
panel Video 4 Input/Output Jacks N are operating  
as inputs. When these jacks are configured for use as  
outputs, the indicator will turn red to show that the jack  
may be used as an output for recording. (See pages 22  
and 40 for more information on configuring the front-  
panel jacks as outputs, rather than inputs.)  
E Channel Adjust Selector: Press the button to  
begin the process of manually adjusting the channel  
level outputs using the source currently playing  
through your AVR. For complete information on  
adjusting the channel output level, see page 41.  
NOTE: This switch is normally left in the “ON” position.  
B Headphone Jack: This jack may be used to lis-  
ten to the AVR 445’s output through a pair of head-  
phones. Be certain that the headphones have a stan-  
dard 1/4" stereo phone plug, or that you use an  
adapter, as needed, to convert the plug on your head-  
phones to the 1/4" jack used on the AVR. When the  
headphone jack is in use, the main room speakers  
will automatically be turned off and the unit will  
output a standard stereo signal. You may also use  
the Dolby Headphone mode for an enhanced  
listening experience.  
F Digital Input Selector: Press this button to begin  
the process of selecting a digital source for use with  
the currently selected input. Once the button has been  
pressed, use the /Buttons H to choose the  
desired input and then press the Set Button I to  
enter the setting into the unit’s memory. See page 35  
for more information on digital audio.  
N Video 4 Input/Output Jacks: These audio/video  
jacks may be used as either inputs or outputs for  
temporary connection to video games or portable  
audio/video products such as camcorders and  
portable audio players. (See pages 22 and 40 for  
more information on switching these jacks between  
inputs and outputs.)  
G Delay Adjust Selector: Press this button to begin  
the process of adjusting the delay settings. See page  
30 for more information on delay adjustments.  
H ‹/Buttons: When making system configura-  
tion changes using the front-panel controls, press  
these buttons to scroll through the available choices  
for the option being adjusted.  
C Tone Mode Button: This button controls the tone  
mode settings, enabling adjustment of the bass and  
treble boost/cut. You may also use it to take the tone  
controls out of the signal path completely for “flat”  
response. The first press of the button displays a  
TONEMODEmessage in the Lower Display  
Line $ and in the on-screen display. To take the  
controls out of the signal path, press either of the  
/Buttons H until the display reads TONE  
OUT. To change the bass or treble settings, press  
the button again until the desired option appears in the  
Lower Display Line $ and in the on-screen display  
and then press either of the /Buttons H to  
enter the desired boost or cut setting. See page 35  
for more information on the tone controls.  
I Set Button: When making system configuration  
changes using the front-panel controls, press this but-  
ton to enter a setting into the unit’s memory.  
J EzSet/EQ Microphone Jack: Before starting the  
EzSet/EQ automated setup process, plug the micro-  
phone into this jack. The microphone does not need  
to be plugged in at other times.  
K Optical 4 Digital Input: Connect the optical digital  
output of an audio or video product to this jack.  
FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS  
NOTE: To make it easier to follow the instructions that refer to this illustration, a larger copy may be downloaded from the Product Support section for this product at  
0 Preamp Outputs  
1 Subwoofer Output  
2 Tape Outputs  
3 A-BUS Connector  
4 Tape Inputs  
5 Surround Speaker Outputs  
6 CD Audio Input  
G Switched AC Accessory Outlet  
H Trigger Output  
I AC Power Cord Socket  
J RS-232 Port  
K HDMI Output  
L HDMI Inputs  
M Component Video Monitor Outputs  
N Multiroom IR Input  
O Component Video Inputs  
P Video Monitor Outputs  
Q DVD Video Inputs  
R Video 1 Video Inputs  
S Video 1 Video Outputs  
T Video 2 Video Inputs  
U Video 3 Video Inputs  
V XM Ready Input  
W USB Connector  
X Optical Digital Audio Output  
Y Coaxial Digital Audio Output  
Z DVD Audio Inputs  
a Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs  
b Optical Digital Audio Inputs  
c 8-Channel Direct Inputs  
d Video 1 Audio Inputs  
e Video 2 Audio Inputs  
f Video 3 Audio Inputs  
g Video 1 Audio Outputs  
h FM Antenna Jack  
7 Front Speaker Outputs  
8 Multiroom Audio Outputs  
TM  
The  
Bridge  
9
Digital Media Player (DMP) Input  
A Fan Vents  
B Full Carrier IR Output  
C IR Output  
D Center Channel Speaker Outputs  
E Surround Back/Multiroom Speaker Outputs  
F IR Input  
i AM Antenna Connections  
NOTE: To assist in making the correct connections for  
multichannel input, output and speaker connections,  
all connection jacks and terminals are color-coded  
as follows:  
Surround Left:  
Surround Right:  
Surround Back Left:  
Blue  
Gray  
Brown  
Composite Video:  
Yellow  
Component Video “Y”: Green  
Component Video “Pr”: Red  
Component Video “Pb”: Blue  
Surround Back Right: Tan  
Subwoofer:  
Coaxial Digital Audio: Orange  
Purple  
Optical Digital In:  
Optical Digital Out:  
Black  
Gray  
Front Left:  
Front Right:  
Center:  
White  
Red  
Green  
8 REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS  
0 Preamp Outputs: Connect these jacks to an  
optional, external power amplifier for applications  
where higher power is desired.  
A Fan Vents: These ventilation holes are the output  
F IR Input: If the AVR 445’s front-panel IR sensor  
is blocked due to cabinet doors or other obstruc-  
tions, an external IR sensor may be used. Connect  
the output of the sensor to this jack.  
of the AVR 445’s airflow system. To ensure proper  
operation of the unit and to avoid possible damage to  
delicate surfaces, make certain that these holes are  
not blocked and that there is at least 3 inches of open  
space between the vent holes and any wooden or  
fabric surface. It is normal for the fan to remain off at  
most normal volume levels. An automatic temperature  
sensor turns the fan on only when it is needed.  
1 Subwoofer Output: Connect this jack to the line-  
level input of a powered subwoofer. If an external sub-  
woofer amplifier is used, connect this jack to the sub-  
woofer amplifier input.  
G Switched AC Accessory Outlet: This outlet may  
be used to power any device you wish to have turned  
on when the AVR 445 is turned on with the Standby/  
On Switch 1.  
2 Tape Outputs: Connect these jacks to the  
Record/Input jacks of an audio recorder.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: The power consumption of  
any device connected to the accessory outlet should  
not exceed 100 watts. Never connect high-power  
devices such as amplifiers or video displays to the  
accessory outlet.  
B Full Carrier IR Output: The output of this jack  
is the full signal received at the Remote Sensor  
Window ^ or input through the IR Input F includ-  
ing the carrier frequency that is removed from signals  
at the IR Output C. Use this output to extend IR  
signals to the input of compatible products either by  
direct connection or through the use of optional,  
external IR “blasters. If you are in doubt as to which  
of the IR Output jacks to use, we recommend that  
you consult with your dealer or installer, or check  
with the manufacturer of the external equipment  
you wish to control.  
3 A-BUS Connector: Connect this jack to optional  
A-BUS®-certified products to extend the multiroom  
capabilities of your AVR 445. See page 19 for more  
information on A-BUS.  
H Trigger Output: Connect this jack to the “Trigger  
In” jack of an optional external component such as an  
audio power amplifier that you want to be controlled  
to mirror the power state of the AVR 445. When this  
connection is used, the AVR 445 will automatically  
send a low-voltage signal to the connected device that  
turns it on when the AVR 445 is on, and off when the  
AVR 445 is placed in the Standby mode. The con-  
nected component must respond to a 6-volt presence  
as the control signal.  
4
Tape Inputs: Connect these jacks to the Play/Out  
jacks of an audio recorder.  
5 Surround Speaker Outputs: Connect these out-  
puts to the matching + and – terminals on your sur-  
round channel speakers. In conformance with the CEA  
color-code specification, the blue terminal is the posi-  
tive (+) terminal that should be connected to the red  
(+) terminal on the Surround Left speaker with older  
color-coding, while the gray terminal should be con-  
nected to the red (+) terminal on the Surround Right  
speaker with the older color-coding. Connect the black  
(–) terminal on the AVR to the matching black nega-  
tive (–) terminals for each surround speaker. (See  
page 17 for more information on speaker polarity.)  
C IR Output: This connection permits the IR sensor  
in the receiver to serve remote controlled devices with  
“stripped carrier.” Connect this jack to the “IR IN” jack  
on compatible Harman Kardon equipment.  
I AC Power Cord Socket: Connect the AC power  
cord here when the installation is complete. To ensure  
safe operation, use only the power cord supplied with  
the unit. If a replacement is required, it must be of the  
same type and capacity.  
D Center Channel Speaker Outputs: Connect  
these outputs to the matching + and – terminals on  
your center channel speaker. In conformance with the  
CEA color-code specification, the green terminal is the  
positive (+) terminal that should be connected to the  
red (+) terminal on speakers with the older color-cod-  
ing. Connect the black (–) terminal on the AVR to the  
black negative (–) terminal on your speaker. (See  
page 17 for more information on speaker polarity.)  
6 CD Audio Inputs: Connect these jacks to the  
left/right analog audio output of a compact disc player  
or CD changer or other audio source.  
J RS-232 Port: This jack may be used to control  
the AVR 445 over a bidirectional RS-232 serial  
control link to a compatible computer or programmable  
remote control system. Due to the complexity of  
programming RS-232 commands, we strongly  
recommend that connections to this port for  
control purposes be made by a trained and qualified  
technician or installer.  
7 Front Speaker Outputs: Connect these outputs  
to the matching + or – terminals on your left and right  
speakers. When making speaker connections, always  
make certain to maintain correct polarity by connecting  
the color-coded (white for front left and red for front  
right) (+) terminals on the AVR 445 to the red (+)  
terminals on the speakers and the black (–) terminals  
on the AVR 445 to the black (–) terminals on the speakers.  
See page 17 for more information on speaker polarity.  
E Surround Back/Multiroom Speaker Outputs:  
These speaker terminals are normally used to power  
the surround back left/surround back right speakers  
in a 7.1-channel system. However, they may also be  
used to power the speakers in a second zone, which  
will receive the output selected for a multiroom system.  
To change the output fed to these terminals from  
the default of the Surround Back speakers to the  
Multiroom Output, you must change a setting in the  
Multiroom menu of the OSD system. See page 44 for  
more information on configuring this speaker output.  
K HDMI Output: Connect this jack to the HDMI  
input on a compatible HDMI-equipped video display.  
L HDMI Inputs: Connect the HDMI output of video  
sources such as a DVD player, set-top box or HDTV  
tuner to either of these jacks.  
8 Multiroom Audio Outputs: Connect these jacks  
to the optional external audio power amplifier and  
video distribution system that delivers the source  
selected for multizone distribution.  
M Component Video Monitor Outputs: Connect  
these outputs to the component video inputs of a  
video display.  
TM  
The  
9
Digital Media Player (DMP) Input:  
Bridge  
In normal surround system use, the brown and black  
terminals are the surround back left channel positive  
(+) and negative (–) connections and the tan and  
black terminals are the surround back right positive  
(+) and negative (–) terminals. For multiroom use,  
connect the brown and black SBL terminals to the  
red and black connections on the left remote zone  
speaker and connect the tan and black SBR terminals  
to the red and black terminals on the right remote  
zone speaker.  
With the AVR 445 turned off, connect the optional  
N Multiroom IR Input: Connect the output of an IR  
sensor in a remote room to this jack to operate the  
AVR 445’s multiroom control system.  
TM  
The  
Harman Kardon  
to this connector. Once  
Bridge  
this is done and with a compatible iPod® (optional)  
docked in The Bridge, selecting the The Bridge/DMP  
input allows you to play audio from the iPod and view  
navigation menus on the AVR’s front panel and any  
video display connected to the AVR. You may control  
the iPod’s functions and select tracks using the  
O Component Video Inputs: These inputs may be  
used with any source device that is equipped with  
analog component video outputs, as assigned through  
the IN/OUTSETUPmenu. See page 23  
for more information on configuring the component  
video inputs.  
/¤//›n©  
GIJπ  
, Set  
F
œ
and Transport  
buttons. See page 39 for more  
information.  
REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS  
P Video Monitor Outputs: Connect these jacks to  
the composite or S-video input of a TV monitor or  
video projector to view the on-screen menus and the  
output of any standard video source selected by the  
receiver’s video switcher.  
a Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs: Connect the coax  
digital output from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, LD  
player or CD player to these jacks. The signal may be a  
Dolby Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard PCM digital  
source. Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD  
player to these jacks.  
Q DVD Video Inputs: Connect the composite or  
S-video outputs of a DVD player or other video source  
to these jacks.  
b Optical Digital Audio Inputs: Connect the optical  
digital output from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, LD  
player or CD player to these jacks. The signal may be a  
Dolby Digital signal, a DTS signal or a standard PCM  
digital source.  
R Video 1 Video Inputs: Connect the composite or  
S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of a VCR or other video  
source to these jacks.  
c 8-Channel Direct Inputs: These jacks are used  
for connection to source devices such as high-resolu-  
tion DVD players, DVD-Audio or SACD players with  
discrete analog audio outputs. Depending on the  
source device in use, all eight jacks may be used,  
though in many cases only connections to the front  
left/right, center, surround left/right and LFE (sub-  
woofer input) jacks will be used for 5.1 audio signals.  
S Video 1 Video Outputs: Connect the composite  
or S-video REC/IN jacks of a VCR or other video  
recording device such as a DVD recorder or PVR to  
these jacks.  
T Video 2 Video Inputs: Connect the composite or  
S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of a VCR or other video  
source to these jacks.  
U Video 3 Video Inputs: Connect the composite or  
S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of a VCR or other video  
source to these jacks.  
d Video 1 Audio Inputs: Connect the left/right  
PLAY/OUT audio output jacks on a VCR or other video  
source to these jacks.  
V XM Ready Input: When an optional XM Connect  
& Play module is connected to this jack, and the XM  
service activated, you will be able to enjoy the XM  
Radio through your AVR 445. See page 39 for more  
information.  
e Video 2 Audio Inputs: Connect the left/right  
PLAY/OUT audio output jacks on a VCR or other video  
source to these jacks.  
f Video 3 Audio Inputs: Connect the left/right  
PLAY/OUT audio output jacks on a VCR, PVR, cable  
set-top, satellite receiver, HDTV receiver or other video  
source to these jacks.  
W USB Connector: Connect a cable with a USB  
“Mini B” connector to the AVR and the other end to  
a compatible computer running Windows® 2000,  
Windows XP or higher with the latest service packs  
installed, to use this port to listen to audio from the  
computer through the AVR 445. This connection is  
also used to connect a compatible computer to the  
AVR for system upgrades, when available. See page  
37 for more information on playback of computer  
audio with the AVR. Instructions for upgrades will  
accompany the upgrade file download package.  
g Video 1 Audio Outputs: Connect the left/right  
REC/IN audio input jacks on a VCR or other video  
source to these jacks.  
h FM Antenna Jack: Connect the supplied indoor or  
an optional external FM antenna to this terminal.  
i AM Antenna Connections: Connect the AM loop  
antenna supplied with the receiver to these terminals. If  
an external AM antenna is used, make connections to  
the AM and GND terminals in accordance with the  
instructions supplied with the antenna.  
X Optical Digital Audio Output: Connect this jack  
to the optical digital input connector on a CD-R/RW,  
MiniDisc or other compatible digital recorder.  
Y Coaxial Digital Audio Output: Connect this jack  
to the coaxial digital input of a CD-R/RW, MiniDisc or  
other compatible digital recorder.  
Z DVD Audio Inputs: Connect the left/right analog  
outputs of a DVD player or other audio source to  
these jacks.  
10 REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
Power Off Button  
Power On Button  
LCD Information Display  
Input Selectors  
AVR Selector  
Test Button  
DSP Surround Mode Selector  
Logic 7 Mode Select Button  
Direct Button  
Clear Button  
EzSet/EQ On/Off Button  
Tuning Mode Button  
j
0
1
i
2
3
4
m Channel Select Button  
n Navigation Button  
o Digital Select Button  
h
g
f
5
7
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
Set Button  
6
8
Transport Play Buttons  
Volume Up/Down Selectors  
Transport Fast-Play/Scan Buttons  
Main Transport Controls  
Track Skip Up/Down Buttons  
Preset Up/Down Button  
Tuning Up/Down Button  
Disc Skip Button  
Program Button  
Light Button  
Multiroom Button  
Macro Buttons  
Sleep Button  
Night Mode Button  
OSD Button  
Tone Control Button  
Dim Button  
Tuner/FM Select Button  
Channel Up/Down Selector  
Delay Select Button  
Speaker Select Button  
Memory Button  
e
c
d
9
B
A
C
b
Z
a
D
F
H
E
G
Y
W
I
K
J
L
c Numeric Keys  
d Stereo Mode Select Button  
e DTS Neo:6 Mode Select Button  
f DTS Digital Mode Select Button  
g
h
X
M
O
Q
Dolby Mode Select Button  
6-Channel/8-Channel Input Select  
N
P
V
T
U
S
i Mute Button  
j Lens  
R
NOTES:  
• The function names shown here are each button’s feature when used with the AVR 445.  
Most buttons have additional functions when used with other devices. When a button is pressed,  
the function name will appear in the bottom line of the LCD Information Display c.  
• The jack on the upper right side of the remote is reserved for future use. Do not remove the  
plug provided or connect any device to the jack.  
• To make it easier to follow the instructions that refer to this illustration, a larger copy may be  
MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
IMPORTANT NOTE: The AVR 445’s remote may  
be programmed to control up to thirteen devices,  
including the AVR 445. Before using the remote,  
it is important to remember to press the Input  
In normal operation, the remote will revert to control-  
ling the AVR when no button is pressed for 6 seconds.  
This allows the remote to automatically return to con-  
trol of important functions such as volume, mute and  
surround mode selection after you have used the  
remote to control another device. If you wish to  
change the length of time that the remote operates  
another device, or to have the remote remain active  
for control of the other device (such as a DVD player  
or set-top box) until you manually return control to the  
appears in the Upper Display Line C and in the  
on-screen display, each press of the Tuning Up/Down  
Buttons 3M  
π
will move the frequency up or  
down in single-step increments. When the FM band is  
in use, pressing the button so that the MANUAL  
mode is activated will enable you to tune stations with  
weak signals by changing to monaural reception. (See  
page 39 for more information on AM/FM tuner opera-  
tion.) When listing to XM Radio, press this button to  
scroll through the following display options for the  
Lower Display Line D: Channel Name Channel  
Category Artist Title. (See pages 39–40 for  
more information on XM Radio operation.)  
Selector Button  
3
that corresponds to the unit  
you wish to operate. In addition, the AVR 445’s  
remote is shipped from the factory to operate the  
AVR 445 and most Harman Kardon brand products.  
The remote is also capable of operating a wide variety  
of other products using the control codes that are part  
of the remote. Before using the remote with other  
products, follow the instructions on pages 46–49  
to program the proper codes for the products in  
your system.  
AVR by pressing the AVR Selector  
4, follow the  
instructions on page 55.  
4
AVR Selector: Pressing this button will switch the  
remote so that it will operate the AVR 445’s functions. If  
the AVR 445 is in the Standby mode, it will also turn the  
AVR 445 on.  
C Channel Select Button: This button is used  
to start the process of manually setting the AVR 445’s  
output levels to an external source. Once this button is  
It is also important to remember that many of the  
buttons on the remote take on different functions,  
depending on the product selected using the Input  
Selectors d. The descriptions shown here primarily  
detail the functions of the remote when it is used to  
operate the AVR 445.  
⁄ ¤  
/
pressed, press the  
Navigation Button Dto  
5
Test Button: Press this button to begin the  
select the channel being adjusted, then press the Set  
sequence used to manually calibrate the AVR 445’s  
output levels. (See page 31 for more information on  
manually calibrating the AVR 445.)  
⁄ ¤  
/
Button  
p
,
followed by the  
Navigation Button  
D again, to change the level setting. (See page 41 for  
more information.)  
a Power Off Button: Press this button to place  
the AVR 445 or a selected device in the Standby  
mode. Note that this will turn off the main room  
functions, but if the Multiroom system is activated,  
it will continue to function.  
g DSP Surround Mode Selector: Press this  
button to select one of the DSP surround modes, such  
as Hall 1, Hall 2 or Theater. Each press of the button  
selects another mode. (See page 58 for more infor-  
mation on surround modes.)  
D Navigation Button: This disc-like button is  
used to navigate through the on-screen configuration  
menus, to scroll through option lists and to select  
choices for the various settings such as delay, speakers,  
surround modes, digital inputs, etc. To use the button,  
simply press it left, right, up or down in the direction  
indicated by the /¤//icons printed on the  
button disc. Depending on the specific task, pressing  
the button will either change the menu or a configura-  
tion choice, or change the option shown in the on-  
screen or front-panel display. The sections in this man-  
ual describing the unit’s individual features and config-  
uration options contain specific information on how  
navigation controls are used.  
1
Power On Button: Press this button to turn on  
the power to a device selected by first pressing one of  
the Input Selectors  
7
Logic 7 Mode Select Button: Press this button  
to select from among the available Logic 7 surround  
modes. (See page 58 for available Logic 7 options.)  
3
.
2
LCD Information Display: This two-line screen  
8
Direct Button: Press this button when the tuner  
displays various information, depending on the com-  
mands that have been entered into the remote.  
is in use to start the sequence for direct entry of a  
station’s frequency. After pressing the button, simply  
press the proper Numeric Keys  
c
to select a  
3
Input Selectors: Pressing one of these buttons  
station. (See page 39 for more information on the tuner.)  
will perform three actions at the same time. First, if the  
AVR 445 is not turned on, this will power up the unit.  
Next, it will select the source shown on the button as  
the input to the AVR 445. Finally, it will change the  
remote control so that it controls the device selected.  
9
Clear Button: When programming the remote  
E
Digital Select Button: Press this button to  
or using the EzSet feature, press this button to cancel  
the current function. When using the remote to enter  
frequencies for direct tuner access, press this button  
to clear previous entries.  
assign one of the digital inputs abKL to a source.  
p
Set Button: This button is used to enter settings  
The buttons labeled DVD, DMP, XM and HDMI 1 are  
each used to select either of two input sources:  
into the AVR 445’s memory. It is also used in the  
setup procedures for delay time, speaker configuration  
and channel output level adjustment.  
A
EzSet/EQ Button: Press this button to turn the  
filters used by EzSet/EQ on or off. This allows you to hear  
the difference in system performance when EzSet/EQ is  
engaged or out of the signal path.  
• The first press of the DVD Button selects the compo-  
nent connected to the DVD inputs. A second press  
of this button selects the component connected to  
the CD inputs.  
G
Transport Play Buttons: These buttons have  
no direct function on the AVR 445, but they are used  
when the remote is programmed for a compatible  
DVD, CD or tape player. Pressing these buttons will  
transmit a forward- or reverse-play command,  
according to the capabilities of the player being  
controlled. In the factory default setting, these buttons  
are programmed for Harman Kardon DVD players so  
that you may control a compatible player without  
having to switch devices.  
B
Tuning Mode Button: When using listening to  
AM or FM stations, press this button to change the  
tuner mode between manual and automatic. When the  
button is pressed so that AUTO/STEREO  
appears in the Upper Display Line C and in the  
on-screen display, only stations with acceptable signal  
quality will be tuned, and the tuner will play FM sta-  
tions in stereo, when available. In the AUTOmode,  
• The first press of the button labeled DMP selects  
The Bridge as the input. A second press of this button  
selects the device connected to the Tape inputs.  
• The first press of the XM button selects XM Radio  
as the input. A second press selects the source  
connected to the USB jack as the input.  
when the Tuning Up/Down Buttons 3M  
π
• The first press of the HDMI 1 button selects the  
device that is connected to the HDMI 1 jack.  
A second press selects the device connected to  
the HDMI 2 jack.  
H
Volume Up/Down Selectors: These controls  
are pressed, the unit will automatically search for the  
next available station with good signal strength. When  
this button is pressed so that MANUAL/MONO  
share the common disc in the lower section of the  
remote. To raise the volume, press the button marked  
by pressing toward the top of the remote. To lower  
12 MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
¤
the volume, press the button marked by pressing  
station with acceptable signal strength. When the next  
higher- or lower-frequency station with a strong-  
enough signal is tuned, the frequency scan will stop  
and the Lower Display Line $ and the on-screen  
display will indicate AUTOTUNED. When an FM  
Stereo station is tuned, the display will read AUTO  
STTUNED. See page 39 for more information  
on using the tuner.  
in the Lower Display Line $. To take the controls  
out of the signal path, press either of the /¤  
Navigation Buttons n until the display reads  
TONEOUT. To change the bass or treble set-tings,  
press the button again until the desired option appears  
in the Lower Display Line $ and in the on-screen  
display and then press either of the /¤ Navigation  
Buttons n to enter the desired boost or cut setting.  
See page 35 for more information on the tone controls.  
‹ ›  
/
toward the bottom of the remote. The  
buttons on  
the left and right sides of this disc change channels up  
or down when the TV, cable box or satellite Input  
Selectors  
3
have been pressed.  
s Transport Fast-Play/Scan Buttons: These but-  
tons have no direct function on the AVR 445, but they  
are used when the remote is programmed for a com-  
patible DVD, CD or tape player. Pressing these buttons  
will transmit a fast-play forward, fast-play reverse, or fast-  
forward or -reverse scan command, according to the  
capabilities of the player being controlled. In the factory  
default setting, these buttons are preprogrammed with  
the remote codes for Harman Kardon DVD players so  
that you may control a compatible player without hav-  
ing to switch devices.  
N
Disc Skip Button: This button has no direct  
function for the AVR 445 but may be used to change  
the disc in a CD or DVD changer when the remote is  
programmed for that type of device.  
W Dim Button: Press this button to activate the  
Dimmer function, which reduces the brightness of the  
front-panel display, or turns it off entirely. Press the  
button once to change the display to reduce the  
brightness by 50%, and press it again within 5 sec-  
onds and the main display will go completely dark.  
Note that this setting is temporary; regardless of any  
changes, the display will always return to full-bright-  
ness when the AVR is turned on. The blue illumination  
around the Standby/On Switch 1 will always  
remain at full-brightness, regardless of the setting, to  
remind you that the AVR is still turned on. The blue  
accent lighting inside the volume control will also  
remain at full-brightness when the panel is at 50%,  
but go out when the panel lights are fully dimmed.  
O
Program Button: This button is used to begin  
the process of programming the remote. Press and hold  
this button for 3 seconds to place the remote in the  
programming mode. Once the red LED under the Set  
J
Main Transport Controls: These buttons have  
Button  
p
lights, release the button. You may then  
no direct function on the AVR 445, but they are used  
when the remote is programmed for a compatible  
DVD, CD or tape player. Pressing these buttons  
will transmit a stop (Í), record (Î), or pause ( )  
command, according to the capabilities of the player  
being controlled. In the factory default setting, these  
buttons are programmed with the remote codes for  
Harman Kardon DVD players so that you may control  
a compatible player without having to switch devices.  
select from the desired option. (See pages 46–56 for  
more information on configuring the remote.)  
P
Light Button: Press this button to activate the  
remote’s backlight for ease of use in darkened rooms.  
Q
Multiroom Button: Press this button to begin  
the process of activating the multiroom system or  
to change the input or volume level for the second  
zone. (See page 44 for additional information on the  
multiroom system.)  
X Tuner/FM Select Button: This button functions  
in two ways. Press it up, toward the top of the remote,  
to select the tuner as the AVR’s input. The first press  
will call up the last-used station (or XM channel).  
Subsequent presses will select the last-used FM, AM  
and XM Radio station or channel. When the button is  
pressed down, toward the bottom of the remote, the  
last-tuned FM station is selected as the AVR’s input.  
K
Track Skip Up/Down Buttons: These buttons  
R
Macro Buttons: Press these buttons to store or  
do not have a direct function with the AVR 445, but  
when used with a compatibly programmed CD or DVD  
changer, they will change the track or chapter currently  
being played. In the factory default setting, these buttons  
are programmed with the remote codes for Harman Kardon  
DVD players so that you may control a compatible player  
without having to switch devices.  
recall a “Macro, which is a preprogrammed sequence  
of commands stored in the remote. (See page 49 for  
more information on macros.)  
S Sleep Button: Press this button to place the unit  
in the Sleep mode. After the time shown in the display,  
the AVR 445 will automatically go into the Standby  
mode. Each press of the button changes the time until  
turn-off in the following order:  
Y
Channel Up/Down Selector: This button has no  
function when the AVR is being controlled, but when  
programmed for use with a VCR, TV, cable box, satel-  
lite receiver or other similar product, it will change the  
channel up or down. See pages 46–56 for more  
information on programming the remote.  
L
Preset Up/Down Button: When the tuner is in  
use, press this button to scroll through the stations  
programmed into the AVR 445’s memory.  
NOTE: When the AVR 445 is used with The Bridge  
(optional) and your iPod, some of the buttons that are  
used to control the various transport functions on  
source devices are used to control the iPod, and navi-  
gate through its menus and content. Consult the  
owner’s manual packed with The Bridge for more  
information.  
Z Delay Select Button: This button selects  
adjustments to the A/V Sync Delay and the individual  
channel displays. The first press of the button displays  
an A/VSYNCDELAYmessage in the Lower  
Display Line $ and in the on-screen display, which  
means that you may change the amount of time that  
all channels are delayed together behind the video.  
This enables you to compensate for the loss of lip  
sync that may be caused by digital video processing  
in your display or by television stations. To change  
the A/V Sync Delay, press the Set Button p while  
the A/VSYNCDELAYmessage is visible,  
and then use the /¤ Navigation Buttons n  
to change the setting so that the sound and the  
video image are in sync. To change the delay for  
an individual output channel, press the /¤  
Navigation Button n until the desired channel  
name is shown, and then press the Set Button p.  
When the Sleep timer is in use, the front-panel display  
indicators will dim to half-brightness.  
T
Night Mode Button: Press this button to activate  
the Night mode. The Night mode is available in specially  
encoded Dolby Digital sources, and it preserves dialogue  
(center channel) intelligibility at low volume levels.  
M Tuning Up/Down Button: Press this button  
when the tuner is in use to change the station to one  
with a higher or lower frequency, or to change the  
XM channel. When the tuner is in the MANUAL/  
MONOmode, each tap of the selector will increase  
or decrease the frequency by one increment. When  
the tuner receives a signal sufficient for adequate  
reception, MANUALTUNEDwill appear in the  
Lower Display Line $ and in the on-screen display.  
When the tuner is in the AUTO/STEREOmode,  
press the button once, and the tuner will scan for a  
U
OSD Button: Press this button to activate or turn  
off the On-Screen Display (OSD) system used to set up  
or adjust the AVR 445’s parameters.  
V
Tone Control Button: This button controls the  
tone mode settings, enabling adjustment of the bass  
and treble boost/cut. You may also use it to take the  
tone controls out of the signal path completely for  
“flat” response. The first press of the button displays a  
TONEINmessage in the on-screen display and  
MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
e
DTS Neo:6 Mode Select Button: Press this  
Use the /¤ Navigation Buttons n to change  
the delay amount. (See page 30 for more information  
on delay options.)  
button to select a DTS Neo:6 mode. (See page 58  
for the available DTS Neo:6 options.)  
a
Speaker Select Button: Press this button  
f
DTS Digital Mode Select Button: When a  
to begin the process of manually configuring the  
AVR 445’s bass management system. Then press  
DTS-encoded digital source is playing, each press of  
this button will scroll through the available DTS modes.  
The specific choice of modes will vary according to  
the type of encoding on the disc and your system’s  
speaker configuration. When a DTS source is not in  
use, this button has no function. (See page 58 for the  
available DTS digital options.)  
⁄ ¤  
/
the  
Navigation Buttons n to select the  
channel you wish to set up. Press the Set Button  
p and then select another channel to configure.  
When all adjustments have been completed, press  
the Set Button p twice to exit the settings and  
return to normal operation. (See page 28 for more  
information on manual speaker setup.)  
g
Dolby Mode Select Button: This button is used  
to select from the available Dolby Surround modes.  
Each press of this button selects a Dolby Pro Logic II,  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx or Dolby Virtual Speaker mode, as  
available for the number of speakers in your system.  
When a Dolby Digital-encoded source is in use, the  
Dolby Digital mode may also be selected. (See page  
58 for the available Dolby surround mode options.)  
b
Memory Button: Press this button to enter a  
radio station in the AVR 445’s preset memory. First,  
tune the desired station, and then press this button.  
Within 5 seconds of when you see the station’s  
frequency flash in the Upper Display Line # and  
in the on-screen display, press the numeric keys  
for the preset number between 01 and 30 that you  
wish to assign to the station. (See page 39 for more  
information on the tuner, and see page 40 for infor-  
mation on storing XM channel numbers in the preset  
memory.)  
h
6-Channel/8-Channel Input Select: Press this  
button to select the device connected to the 8-Channel  
Direct Inputs c.  
i
Mute Button: Press this button to momentarily  
silence the AVR 445 or TV set being controlled,  
depending on which device has been selected.  
c
Numeric Keys: These buttons serve as a 10-  
button numeric keypad to enter tuner preset positions.  
They are also used to select channel numbers when  
TV, Cable or SAT has been selected on the remote, or  
to select track numbers on a CD, DVD or LD player,  
depending on how the remote has been programmed.  
These buttons are also used to enter letters and num-  
bers when renaming devices in the LCD Information  
Display. (See page 53 for more information on renam-  
ing devices and keys.)  
j
Lens: The infrared emitters behind the plastic  
lens at the top of the remote communicate the remote  
codes to the AVR 445. Be certain that the lens is not  
covered when using the remote, and point the lens  
toward the AVR for best results. In learning mode, the  
remote receives IR codes to be learned through a  
sensor behind the lens.  
NOTE: DO NOT remove the rubber plug that covers the  
jack on the upper right side of the remote. The jack is  
not active and is reserved for future use.  
d
Stereo Mode Select Button: Press this button  
to select a stereo listening mode. When the button is  
pressed so that SURROUNDOFFappears in  
the Lower Display Line $, the AVR will operate  
in a bypass mode with true, fully analog, two-channel  
left/right stereo mode with no surround processing or  
bass management, as opposed to other modes where  
digital processing is used. When the button is pressed  
so that SURROUNDOFFappears in the Lower  
Display Line $, and both the DSP and Surround Off  
Surround Mode Indicators % are lit, you will enjoy  
a two-channel presentation of the sound, along with  
the benefits of bass management. Depending on  
whether your system is configured for 5.1 or 6.1/7.1  
channels, the next press of the button will cause either  
5CHSTEREOor 7CHSTEREOto  
appear, and the stereo signal will be routed to all five  
(or seven) speakers. (See page 58 for more informa-  
tion on stereo playback modes.)  
14 MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ZR 10 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
å
ç
ƒ
©
˙
î
Power Off Button  
OSD Button  
AVR Selector Button  
Input Selectors  
Tuner Selector  
XM Radio Selector  
Navigation Controls  
Volume Up/Down Buttons  
Disc Skip Buttons  
Numeric Keys  
å
ß
ç
Blank Buttons  
¬
µ
ñ
ø
π
œ
®
ß
Clear Button  
E
Direct Button  
Memory Button  
Tuning Mode Button  
Transport Controls  
Set Button  
®
ƒ
TM  
The  
Bridge  
/DMP Selector  
©
˙
î
œ
˙
Mute Button  
IR Transmitter Lens  
NOTES:  
The ZR 10 remote may be used either in the same room  
where the AVR 445 is located or in a separate room  
with an optional infrared sensor or A-BUS® product that  
is connected to the AVR 445’s Multiroom IR Input  
Jack N. When it is used in the same room as the  
AVR 445, it will control the functions of the AVR 445  
or any compatible Harman Kardon products in that  
room. When it is used in a separate room via a sensor  
connected to the Multiroom IR Input Jack e, the  
buttons for Power, Input Source, Volume and Mute will  
control the source and volume for the second zone, as  
connected to the Multiroom Audio Output Jacks  
ª. (See page 44 for complete information on using  
the Multiroom system.)  
π
ø
ñ
µ
¬
• To make it easier to follow the instructions that refer to  
the controls and connectors in this illustration, a larger  
copy may be downloaded from the Product Support  
ZR 10 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ZR 10 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
TM  
The  
Bridge  
å
Power Off Button: When used in the room  
¬
Clear Button: When programming the tuner  
memory, press this button to clear the current entry.  
Direct Button: Press this button when the tuner  
®
Digital Media Player Selector: When  
TM  
The  
Bridge  
where the AVR 445 is located, press this button  
to place the unit in Standby. When it is used in a  
remote room with a sensor that is connected to the  
Multiroom IR Input Jack e, this button turns the  
Multiroom system on and off.  
Harman Kardon’s  
(optional) is connected to  
TM  
The  
Bridge  
Digital Media Player (DMP) Input 9 and  
µ
TM  
The  
Bridge  
a compatible iPod is docked in  
, pressing this  
selector will select the iPod as the audio source input  
device for the AVR 445. In addition, if a video display  
is connected to one of the Video Monitor Outputs  
MP, the iPod’s messages will appear on screen,  
and in the Upper and Lower Display Lines CD.  
is in use to start the entry of a station’s frequency or  
an XM channel number for direct access to that sta-  
tion or channel. After pressing this button, press the  
appropriate Numeric Keys  
.  
OSD Button: Press this button to activate or  
ñ
Memory Button: Press this button to enter a  
turn off the On-Screen Display (OSD) menu system,  
used to set up or adjust the AVR 445’s configuration  
settings.  
station or XM channel number into the AVR 445’s  
memory. First, tune to, or select, the desired station  
or channel, and then press this button. Within five  
seconds, while you see the station or channel flash in  
the Upper Display Line C and in the on-screen  
The ⁄  
œ
/¤/‹  
/Buttons  
©, the Set Button  
and the Transport Controls  
π
may be used  
to navigate the iPod and to operate many functions.  
See page 39, and the manuals for The Bridge and  
your iPod for more information.  
ç
AVR Selector Button: Press this button to turn  
on the AVR 445. The input in use when the unit was  
last on will be selected.  
display, press the Numeric Keys  
for the preset  
ß
Mute Button: When the ZR 10 remote is used  
number between 01 and 30 that you wish to assign  
to the station or channel. (See page 39 for more  
information.)  
Input Selectors: When the AVR 445 is off,  
in the room where the AVR 445 is located, press this  
button to temporarily silence the unit. When it is used  
in a remote room with a sensor that is connected  
to the Multiroom IR Input Jack e, this button  
will temporarily silence the feed to the remote room  
only. Press the button again to return to the previous  
volume level.  
press one of these buttons to select a specific input  
and turn the unit on. When the unit is already in use,  
pressing one of these buttons will change the input.  
ø
Tuning Mode Button: When listening to AM or  
FM stations, press this button to change the tuner  
mode between manual and automatic. When the  
button is pressed so that AUTO/STEREO  
appears in the Upper Display Line C and in the  
on-screen display, only stations with acceptable signal  
quality will be tuned, and the tuner will play FM sta-  
tions in stereo, when available. In the AUTOmode,  
Tuner Selector: Press this button to select the  
Tuner as the input source and listen to the tuner band  
last used. Press the button again to change between  
AM, FM and, if an XM Connect & Play module is con-  
nected and activated, XM Radio.  
IR Transmitter Lens: The infrared code com-  
mands from the remote are sent to the AVR from the  
components behind this lens. To ensure proper opera-  
tion, do not block this area when holding the remote.  
ƒ
XM Radio Selector: Press this button to select  
when the Tuning Up/Down Buttons 3M  
π
XM Radio as the input source when an XM Connect &  
Play module is connected and activated.  
are pressed, the unit will automatically search for the  
next available station with good signal strength. When  
this button is pressed so that MANUAL/MONO  
appears in the Upper Display Line C and in the  
on-screen display, each press of the Tuning Up/Down  
©
Navigation Controls: Depending on the menu  
or function in use, pressing these buttons will navigate  
through menus, scroll through option lists or configura-  
tion choices, or move the cursor position. Press the  
left, right, up or down button, as appropriate to the  
adjustment being made.  
Buttons 3M  
π
will move the frequency up or  
down in single-step increments. When the FM band is  
in use, pressing the button so that the MANUAL  
mode is activated will enable you to tune stations with  
weak signals by changing to monaural reception. (See  
page 41 for more information on AM/FM tuner opera-  
tion.) When listing to XM Radio, press this button to  
scroll through the following display options for the  
Lower Display Line D: Channel Name  
Category  
more information on XM Radio operation.)  
˙
Volume Up/Down Buttons: When the ZR 10  
remote is used in the room where the AVR 445 is  
located, press this button to raise or lower the volume  
in that room. When it is used in a remote room with a  
sensor that is connected to the Multiroom IR Input  
Jack e, this button will raise or lower the volume in  
the remote room.  
Channel  
Title. (See pages 39–40 for  
¦
Artist  
¦
¦
î
Disc Skip Buttons: Press these buttons to  
π
Transport Controls: Press these buttons to  
change discs on compatible Harman Kardon CD or  
DVD changers or players.  
control the operation of a compatible Harman Kardon  
DVD or CD player when the AVR 445 is connected  
to the source unit via the IR Input Jack F. When  
the AVR 445’s tuner or XM Radio is in use, the  
Numeric Keys: Press these buttons to enter a  
station’s frequency or an XM Radio channel number  
after the Direct Button is pressed, or when pro-  
‹‹/›› Prev/Next Buttons  
S
π
are used to  
S
µ
tune up or down through the list of preset stations,  
station frequencies or channel numbers.  
gramming the tuner memories. These buttons may  
also be used for numeric entries when appropriate  
with other compatible sources.  
œ
Set Button: When using the configuration  
menus, press this button to enter a setting to the  
AVR’s memory.  
Blank Buttons: These buttons are not active.  
Pressing them will not change or control any function  
on the AVR 445 or other IR devices.  
16 ZR 10 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
7. Connect the front, center, surround and surround  
back speaker outputs 57DE to the respec-  
tive speakers.  
amplifier, which will be connected to one or more  
subwoofer speakers. If you are using a powered  
subwoofer that does not have line-level input con-  
nections, follow the instructions furnished with the  
speaker for connection information.  
System Installation  
After unpacking the unit, locating it in a place with ade-  
quate ventilation and placing it on a solid surface capable  
of supporting its weight, you will need to make the con-  
nections to your audio and video equipment.  
To ensure that all the audio signals are carried to your  
speakers without loss of clarity or resolution, we sug-  
gest that you use high-quality speaker cable. Many  
brands of cable are available and the choice of cable  
may be influenced by the distance between your  
speakers and the receiver, the type of speakers you  
use, personal preferences and other factors. Your  
dealer or installer is a valuable resource to consult in  
selecting the proper cable.  
9. If an external audio source such as a DVD-Audio,  
SACD or high-definition optical disc player with 5.1  
or 7.1 analog audio outputs is part of your system,  
connect the outputs of the source to the 8-Channel  
Direct Inputs c.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: For your personal safety and to  
avoid possible damage to your equipment and speakers,  
it is always good practice to turn off and unplug the AVR  
and ALL source equipment from the AC output before  
making any audio or video system connections.  
Analog Video Equipment Connections  
Analog video components are connected in the same  
manner as audio components. Again, the use of high-  
quality interconnect cables is recommended to preserve  
signal quality.  
1. Connect the Video Play/Out jacks of a standard  
(composite) video (or S-video outputs of a digital  
video) recorder or conventional VCR to the Video 1  
Video Inputs R on the AVR 445. Connect the  
Record/In jacks from that device to the Video 1  
Video Outputs S on the AVR.  
Audio Equipment Connections  
We recommend that you use high-quality interconnect  
cables when making connections to source equipment  
and recorders to preserve the integrity of the signals.  
Regardless of the brand of cable selected, we recom-  
mend that you use cable with a gauge of 14 or smaller.  
Remember that when specifying cable, the lower the  
number, the thicker the cable.  
1. Connect the analog output of a CD player to the  
CD Audio Inputs 6.  
Cable with a gauge of 16 may be used for short runs  
of less than 10 feet. We do not recommend that you  
use cables with an AWG equivalent of 18 or higher,  
due to the power loss and degradation in performance  
that will occur.  
NOTE: If your CD player has both fixed and variable  
audio outputs, it is best to use the fixed output unless  
you find that the input to the receiver is so low that the  
sound is noisy, or so high that it is distorted.  
2. Connect the analog Audio Left/Right Play/Out jacks  
of the device connected to the Video 1 Inputs to  
the Video 1 Audio Inputs d on the AVR. Connect  
the analog Audio Left/Right Record/In jacks from  
that device to the Video 1 Audio Outputs g on  
the AVR. If the device has a digital audio output,  
connect it to one of the Coaxial a or Optical b  
digital audio inputs.  
2. Connect the analog Play/Out jacks of a cassette  
deck, MD, CD-R or other audio recorder to the  
Tape Inputs 4. Connect the analog Record/In  
jacks on the recorder to the Tape Outputs 2  
on the AVR 445.  
Cables that are run inside walls should have the appro-  
priate markings to indicate listing with UL, CSA or other  
appropriate testing agency standards. Questions about  
running cables inside walls should be referred to your  
installer or a licensed electrician who is familiar with  
the NEC and/or the applicable building codes in  
your area.  
3. Connect the output of a digital source such as  
a CD or DVD changer or player, a video game, a  
digital satellite receiver, an HDTV tuner or digital  
cable set-top box or the output of a compatible  
computer sound card to the Optical and Coaxial  
Digital Audio Inputs abKL.  
When connecting wires to the speakers, be certain  
to observe proper polarity. Note that the positive (+)  
terminal of each speaker connection has a specific color  
code, as noted on page 8. However, most speakers still  
use a red terminal for the positive (+) connection.  
Connect the “negative” or “black” wire to the same  
terminal on both the receiver and the speaker.  
3. Connect the Play/Out jacks of a standard (composite)  
video or (S-video outputs of a digital video) playback  
source such as a set-top box or video game console  
to the Video 2 Video Inputs T or Video 3 Video  
Inputs U. If the device has analog component  
video (Y/Pr/Pb) outputs, connect them to one of  
the Component Video Inputs O.  
4. Connect the coaxial or optical Digital Audio Outputs  
XY on the rear panel of the AVR 445 to the match-  
ing digital input connections on a CD-R, MiniDisc or  
other digital recorder.  
NOTE: While most speaker manufacturers adhere to  
an industry convention of using black terminals for  
negative and red ones for positive, some may vary  
from this configuration. To ensure proper phase and  
optimal performance, consult the identification label on  
your speaker or the speaker’s manual to verify polarity.  
If you do not know the polarity of your speaker, ask  
your dealer for advice before proceeding, or consult  
the speaker’s manufacturer.  
4. Connect the analog audio outputs from the source  
to the matching Video 2 Audio Inputs e or  
Video 3 Audio Inputs f. If the device has a digi-  
tal audio output, connect it to one of the Coaxial  
a or Optical b digital audio inputs.  
5. Assemble the AM loop antenna supplied with the  
unit so that the tabs at the bottom of the antenna  
loop snap into the holes in the base. Connect it to  
the AM Antenna Connections i .  
5. If any of the video source devices has analog  
component video (Y/Pr/Pb) outputs, but not HDMI,  
connect them to Component Video Inputs O.  
The chart on page 59 has the default settings for  
various source devices, but you may make any  
connection and change the configuration setting  
using the IN/OUTSETUPmenu, as  
described on page 23.  
We also recommend that the length of cable used  
to connect speaker pairs be identical. For example,  
use the same length piece of cable to connect the  
front-left and front-right or surround-left and sur-  
round-right speakers, even if the speakers are a  
different distance from the AVR 445.  
6. Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM  
Antenna Jack h. The FM antenna may be  
an external roof antenna, an inside powered or  
wire-lead antenna or a connection from a cable  
TV system. If the antenna or connection uses  
300-ohm twin-lead cable, you must use an optional  
300-ohm-to-75-ohm adapter to make the  
connection.  
6. The default video connection for a DVD player is to  
use the Component Video Input 3 Jacks O on  
the AVR, but you may change this assignment in  
the IN/OUTSETUPmenu (see page 23).  
A DVD player’s composite and S-video outputs may  
also be connected to the DVD Video Inputs Q.  
Only one connection type is required.  
8. Connections to a subwoofer are normally made via  
a line-level audio connection from the Subwoofer  
Output 1 to the line-level input of a subwoofer  
with a built-in amplifier. When a passive subwoofer  
is used, the connection first goes to a power  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
7. The default audio connection for a conventional  
DVD player is to link the coaxial digital audio output  
on the DVD player to the Coaxial 1 Digital Audio  
Input a, but you may also make a connection to  
either the Coaxial a or Optical b digital inputs,  
or to the Analog DVD Audio Inputs Z. You  
may change the assignment in the IN/OUT  
SETUPmenu as described on page 22, or by  
using the front-panel Digital Input Selector F.  
Some source or display components in your system  
may use DVI (Digital Video Interface) for digital video  
connections. DVI carries the same digital video signals  
as HDMI but uses a larger connector and does not  
transport audio or control signals. In most cases, you  
may mix and match DVI and HDMI digital video con-  
nections by using optional connector adapters. Note,  
however, that some DVI-equipped video displays are  
not compatible with the HDCP copy protection coding  
that is increasingly carried with signals connected  
via HDMI. If you have an HDMI source and a DVI-  
equipped display, you may occasionally be unable to  
view a program if the display does not include HDCP.  
This is not the fault of the AVR or your source; it sim-  
ply indicates that the video display is not compatible.  
Connect the output of the remote sensor to the  
IR Input .  
If other components are also prevented from receiving  
remote commands, only one sensor is needed. Simply  
use this unit’s sensor or a remote eye by running a  
connection from the IR Output to the Remote IR  
Input jack on Harman Kardon or other compatible  
equipment.  
If other Harman Kardon-compatible source equipment  
is part of the main room installation, the IR Output  
Jack on the rear panel should be connected to the  
IR IN jack on source equipment. This enables the remote  
room location to control source equipment functions.  
8. To use a portable audio/video product such as a  
camcorder, media player or digital still camera with  
the AVR, or connect a video game console or other  
source that may not always be connected to the  
AVR, connect the video outputs of the source to the  
Video 4 Input/Output Jacks N, behind the  
Front-Panel Door 8. If the source has digital  
audio outputs, connect them to the Optical 4  
Digital Input K or the Coaxial 4 Digital Input L.  
When a remote IR sensor is used to control non-  
Harman Kardon source equipment, we recommend  
that you make a hard-wire connection or use an  
optional, external IR “blaster” connected to the Full  
Carrier IR Output B. If you are in doubt as to which  
IR Output jack to use for the equipment in your sys-  
tem, contact your dealer or installer, or the manufac-  
turer’s support site and ask whether the unit to be  
controlled uses “full carrier” IR commands. When “full  
carrier” commands are used, make the connection to  
the Full Carrier IR Output ¤. Otherwise, make the  
connection to the IR Output .  
The AVR 445 is equipped for HDMI switching, which  
means that it is able to select either of the two HDMI  
inputs as the source that feeds your system’s video  
display. This preserves the digital signal in its original  
form by passing it directly through from source to dis-  
play. However, this also means that the AVR does not  
have access to the signal and thus it is not able to add  
menus or on-screen messages to HDMI signals, or to  
process the audio that may be part of the signal in an  
HDMI connection.  
CONNECTION NOTES:  
• When making connections to the Component  
Video Inputs O or the Coaxial a or Optical  
b digital audio inputs, it is a good idea to make  
note of which jacks are connected to which  
source, using the Worksheet in the Appendix. This  
will help simplify the configuration process.  
Therefore, the following connections are required when  
the AVR 445 is used with HDMI sources:  
• When connecting a source device such as a  
cable set-top box where the audio streams may  
change between digital and analog as you  
change channels, we recommend that you make  
both analog and digital connections. The AVR’s  
Auto Poll feature will automatically sense when  
the digital stream is replaced by an analog output  
and switch the input accordingly. (See page 22  
for more information on the Auto-Poll feature.)  
This dual connection is not required for sources  
(such as DVD players or video games) that always  
output a digital stream.  
NOTE: All remotely controlled components must be  
linked together in a “daisy chain. Connect the IR OUT  
jack of one unit to the IR IN of the next to establish  
this chain.  
• Connect the HDMI output of a source to either of  
the HDMI Inputs L.  
• Connect the HDMI Output K of the AVR to an  
HDMI input on your display.  
Multiroom Audio Connections  
The AVR 445 is equipped with multizone capabilities  
that allow it to send a separate audio source to the  
remote zone from the one selected for use in the  
main room.  
• Connect either an optical or coaxial digital audio  
output from the source to the AVR. The default  
connections are Optical 3 b for a source con-  
nected to HDMI 1 L and Coaxial 3 a for a  
source connected to HDMI 2 L. You may use  
any digital or analog audio source in conjunction  
with the HDMI inputs, but if it varies from the  
default you must make a change to the input’s  
setting, as shown on page 22.  
Depending on your system’s requirements, three  
options are available for audio connection:  
9. Connect the AVR to your video display using one of  
the following connections, even if you will also use  
an HDMI connection:  
Option 1: Use high-quality, shielded audio intercon-  
nect cable from the AVR 445’s location to the remote  
room. In the remote room, connect the interconnect  
cable to a stereo power amplifier. The amplifier will be  
connected to the room’s speakers. At the AVR 445,  
plug the audio interconnect cables into the Multiroom  
Audio Outputs 8 on the AVR 445’s rear panel.  
• If your video display has component video  
inputs (Y/Pr/Pb), connect the Component  
Video/Monitor Outputs M.  
Even when HDMI inputs are used, it is important to  
make sure that a component, S-video or compos-  
ite video connection is made between the AVR and  
your display. This is needed to view both the setup  
menus and on-screen messages, and to view other  
(non-HDMI) video sources. The AVR 445 does not  
convert analog video signals to HDMI.  
• If your display does not have digital or compo-  
nent video inputs, connect the Video Monitor  
Output P on the AVR to the matching input on  
your display. Only one connection is needed, and  
S-video is the higher quality signal.  
Option 2: Connect the Multiroom Audio Outputs  
8 on the AVR 445 to the inputs of an optional stereo  
power amplifier. Run high-quality speaker wire from  
the amplifier to the speakers in the remote room.  
System and Power Connections  
The AVR 445 is designed for flexible use with multiroom  
systems, external control components and power amplifiers.  
HDMI Connections  
Option 3: Taking advantage of the AVR 445’s built-in  
seven-channel amplifier, it is possible to use two of the  
amplifier channels to power speakers in the remote  
room. When using this option, you will not be able to  
use the full 7.1-channel capabilities of the AVR 445 in  
the main listening room, but you will be able to add  
another listening room without external power ampli-  
fiers. To use the internal amplifiers to power a remote  
HDMIis the abbreviation for High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface, which is quickly becoming the standard for  
connections between high-definition video/audio source  
products and displays. HDMI is a digital connection, elimi-  
nating the need to convert signals back and forth from  
digital to analog.  
Main Room Remote Control Extension  
If the receiver is placed behind a solid or smoked-  
glass cabinet door, the obstruction may prevent the  
remote sensor from receiving commands. In this  
event, an optional remote sensor may be used.  
18 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
zone, connect the speakers for the remote room loca-  
tion to the Surround Back/Multiroom Speaker  
Outputs . Before using the remote room, you will  
need to configure the amplifiers for surround operation  
by changing a setting in the MULTIROOM  
menu, following the instructions shown on page 44.  
Connect the larger, “A” connector on the cable to your  
To purchase an XM antenna module, consult your  
After following the instructions packed with the mod-  
ule, place the XM antenna near a south-facing window  
and run the cable to the AVR. Connect the plug at the  
end of the cable to the XM Ready Input V. Once  
the connection is made, follow the instructions on page  
39 for more information on listening to XM Radio.  
computer or a USB hub and the end with the “Mini”  
USB connector to the USB Port W on the AVR’s  
rear panel.  
NOTES ON USB:  
• The USB port on the AVR 445 is to be used only  
for connection to a computer or a hub connected  
directly to a computer. DO NOT connect it to other  
devices such as portable audio players, card readers,  
USB memory storage devices, external hard drives,  
USB accessories, digital cameras or cellular phones.  
Connection to these devices may cause damage to  
the device and/or the AVR that is not covered by  
the AVR’s warranty.  
NOTE: For all options, you may connect an optional  
IR sensor in the remote room to the AVR 445 via an  
appropriate cable. Connect the sensor’s cable to the  
Multiroom IR Input e on the AVR 445 and use  
the ZR 10 remote to control the room volume. You may  
install an optional volume control between the output of  
the amplifiers and the speakers in options 1 and 2.  
NOTES on XM Radio:  
• XM Radio requires the purchase of additional,  
optional hardware and a separate subscription to  
the XM service.  
• XM Radio is available only in the continental United  
States and Canada. It is not available in Alaska  
or Hawaii.  
A-BUS® Installation Connections  
• The AVR 445’s USB connection may only be used  
for audio playback and system upgrades. It may not  
be used for other purposes, such as system control,  
video or still-image playback.  
The AVR 445 is among the few receivers available  
that offer built-in A-BUS/READY operation. When used  
with an optional A-BUS product, you have all the ben-  
efits of remote zone operation without the need for an  
external power amplifier.  
• XM reception requires that the antenna be able to  
“see” the XM satellites or receive a signal from one  
of the XM ground-based repeaters. Depending on  
your installation and location, XM service may not  
be available in some areas.  
Trigger Connection  
To use the AVR 445 with an approved A-BUS prod-  
uct, simply connect it to the AVR 445 using standard  
Category 5 wiring that is properly rated for the specific  
in-wall installation. Terminate the wiring at the receiver  
end to a standard RJ-45 connector in compliance  
with the instructions furnished with the A-BUS product.  
The AVR 445 is equipped with a low-voltage trigger  
that may be used to control a wide variety of compati-  
ble, optional devices that respond to voltage actuation  
commands. This includes external audio power amplifiers,  
video screens, motorized blinds and other compatible  
products in a home theater or automation system.  
Due to the complexity of interfacing with power-  
controlled devices, we strongly recommend that  
they be installed by a qualified professional.  
AC Power Connections  
This unit is equipped with an accessory AC outlet  
that may be used to power accessory devices, but it  
should not be used with high-current draw equipment  
such as power amplifiers. The total power draw may  
not exceed 100 watts.  
No further installation or adjustment is needed, as the  
A-BUS jack on the AVR 445 routes the signals to their  
proper destination for power, signal source and control.  
The output fed to the A-BUS jack is determined by the  
AVR 445’s multiroom system and menus.  
This Switched AC Accessory Outlet is powered  
only when the unit is on. This is recommended only  
for devices that have a mechanical power switch that  
may be left in the “ON” position.  
The Trigger Output H delivers 6 volts DC when  
activated, and removes the voltage when the AVR  
is turned off. The connection is a 3.5mm mono mini  
plug with the signal on the center pin (“tip”) and the  
outer shaft (“ring”) acting as the negative or ground  
connection.  
RS-232 Connections  
NOTE: Many audio and video products go into a  
Standby mode when they are used with switched out-  
lets. This type of product may not operate properly  
when used with the switched outlet.  
The AVR 445 is equipped with an RS-232 Serial  
Connection Port a that may be connected to a  
compatible, optional, external computer, keypad or  
control system for bidirectional communications that  
enable the external system to control the AVR, and for  
the AVR to report status and handshake data back to  
the controller. Use of the RS-232 port for this type of  
control requires specific technical knowledge, and we  
recommend that any connection and programming for  
control be made by a trained installer or technician  
familiar with the equipment being used.  
The Trigger Output H is for use with devices such as  
power amplifiers that you wish to activate whenever the  
AVR is turned on, regardless of the input selected.  
The AVR 445 features a removable power cord  
that allows wires to be run in advance to a complex  
installation so that the unit itself need not be installed  
until it is ready for connection. When all needed  
connections have been made, connect the AC  
power cord to the AC Power Cord Jack ·.  
After checking for voltage, current and polarity com-  
patibility between the device being controlled and the  
AVR, simply connect one end of the trigger cable to  
the device being controlled and the other end to the  
Trigger Output H on the AVR.  
The AVR 445 draws significantly more current than  
other household devices, such as computers, that use  
removable power cords. For that reason, it is important  
that only the cord supplied with the unit (or a direct  
replacement of identical capacity) be used.  
The physical connection to the AVR 445’s RS-232  
port is a standard D-SUB 9 connection, but to ensure  
compatible and proper operation, specific software  
commands and pin wiring schemes may be required.  
IMPORTANT NOTE ON THE TRIGGER CONNECTION:  
The current draw from the trigger jack cannot  
exceed 1.0mA.  
XM Radio Connections  
Once the power cord is connected, you are almost  
ready to enjoy the AVR 445’s incredible power  
and fidelity!  
USB Connections  
XM Radio is a satellite-delivered, subscription-based,  
programming service that provides a wide range of  
music, sports, news and information programming with  
digital audio quality. The AVR 445 is XM Connect &  
Play-ready, which means that you can easily add the  
XM service to your home audio system by purchasing  
an XM antenna module, activating an account with XM  
and then making a simple, single-cable connection to  
your AVR.  
The AVR 445 is one of the few A/V receivers to offer  
a USB connection that may be used for both playback  
of compatible audio content from a computer and for  
loading of system updates (when available).  
The physical connection between a computer and the  
AVR is a simple one, requiring only a cable with a USB  
“A” type connector on one side and a USB “Mini B” on  
the other.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
When all audio, video and system connections have  
been made, the final steps before listening to your new  
AVR are to make the configuration adjustments that  
tailor the unit to the other components in your system,  
as well as accommodate your personal listening pref-  
erences. A few minutes spent to correctly calibrate and  
configure your system will greatly add to your listening  
pleasure.  
Although the natural tendency is to place the speakers  
aim the surround speakers so that they point inward,  
toward the listening area, rather than perpendicular  
to the walls.  
so they are parallel to the wall behind them, and thus  
in line with the video screen, the preferred placement  
is to angle the speakers slightly (“toe in”) so that they  
point at the prime listening position.  
Surround Speakers for 6.1 Systems  
A 6.1 surround system adds an additional speaker in  
the center back surround position. We do not recom-  
mend this configuration, as it will not deliver a full sur-  
round sound field when any 7.1-channel mode is  
used, since some signals will be sent to an output  
(either left or right) where no speaker is present.  
Center Channel Speaker  
The ideal location for the center channel speaker is at  
“0 degrees” in our circle, directly in front of the prime  
listening position. Place the center channel speaker as  
close to the top (or bottom) of the video screen as  
possible so that when you position the front left/right  
speakers the tweeters of all three front channel speak-  
ers are within 24" of one another.  
Speaker Selection and Placement  
While the most seamless surround sound reproduction  
comes from the use of speakers with identical or care-  
fully matched driver elements at each position, no  
matter which brand or type of speakers you prefer, it  
is always best to use the same model or series for  
the left front, center and right front speakers. Similarly,  
it is also desirable to use the same model or series  
for the surround speakers. This ensures that the sound-  
stage will be relatively seamless when a sound moves  
from one side of the room to the other.  
If a 6.1 system is to be used, first place the speakers  
for a 5.1 system, and place the “sixth” speaker at the  
center of the back of the room, pointing directly  
toward the front center channel speaker.  
Surround Speakers for 5.1 Systems  
In a 5.1 surround system, an additional pair of  
left/right speakers is added. Although many believe  
that these speakers should be placed at the rear of  
the room, the preferred position for them is at the  
sides of the room, with rear placement a second  
option when room conditions prevent the use of side-  
mounted surround speakers.  
Video Screen  
Center Speaker  
Front Left  
Speaker  
Front Right  
Speaker  
30°  
30°  
Speaker Placement  
Once you have selected your speakers, it is important  
that they be placed in positions that enable them to do  
the best job of reproducing the sound as it was meant  
to be heard, regardless of the program content. The  
placement of speakers can have a noticeable impact  
on the accuracy of the surround process, particularly in  
multichannel systems.  
110°  
110°  
When side-wall placement is possible, place the  
left/right surround speakers at a point that is 110  
degrees along our circle from the center of the video  
screen. This translates to placing them to the side and  
slightly behind your preferred listening position. If pos-  
sible, angle the speakers in slightly so that they are  
pointing toward the listener’s ears.  
Listening Position  
Side Surround  
Right Speaker  
Side Surround  
Left Speaker  
When placing your speakers in a listening room, pic-  
ture an imaginary circle starting at the center of your  
video screen that arcs around the room with the prime  
listening position, or “sweet spot,” at the center of the  
circle. Depending on the number of speakers in your  
system, there is a recommended placement along the  
circle for each speaker, though the specific construc-  
tion of your room, taking into account the available  
walls, bookcases, or floor space at which the speakers  
may be placed will obviously have some impact on  
where the speakers are ultimately located. As a general  
rule, try to place all speakers so that they are posi-  
tioned at the same height as your ears when you are  
seated at the prime listening position.  
Back Surround  
Speaker  
Video Screen  
Center Speaker  
6.1 Placement Diagram  
Front Right  
Front Left  
Speaker  
30°  
Speaker  
Do not connect the center back surround speaker at  
this time, as you must first run EzSet/EQ as shown on  
page 26 so that the system configures the five main  
channel speakers only. After completing the EzSet/EQ  
process, connect the center surround back speaker to  
one of the Surround Back Speaker Outputs E  
and manually configure the system for surround back  
speakers, as shown on pages 29–30. DO NOT run  
EzSet/EQ with only a single surround back speaker  
connected, as a failure message will result.  
30°  
110°  
110°  
150°  
150°  
Side Surround  
Right Speaker  
Side Surround  
Left Speaker  
Use the following suggestions as a guide, and make  
the changes needed to fit the speakers to your room.  
Don’t be afraid to experiment a bit until you find the  
right combination of locations that works for you. At  
the end of the day, there is no real “right” or “wrong”  
place to put the speakers; work to optimize their loca-  
tions so that audio moves across the front of the room  
smoothly, without seeming to jump from one speaker  
to another.  
We recommend that you consider adding a second  
surround back speaker for a full 7.1 system, as soon  
as possible.  
Alternate placement  
for Side Surround  
Left Speaker  
Alternate placement  
for Side Surround  
Right Speaker  
Surround Speakers for 7.1 Systems  
5.1 Placement Diagram  
For the ultimate home theater experience, a 7.1  
surround system uses both traditional surround  
left/right channels and a surround back left/right  
speaker pair. In a 7.1 system, the front left/center/right  
speakers remain in the same place as they would be  
for a 5.1 or 6.1 system, but due to the number of  
speakers involved, the placement of the surround  
speakers is different.  
If it is not possible to place the surround speakers at  
the sides of the room, the alternate position is at the  
back of the room, at a spot that is about 150 degrees  
around our circle from the center of the video screen.  
Another way to spot the optimal, alternate rear-wall  
mounting position is to place the left surround speaker  
on the back wall so that it points directly at the front  
right speaker, and to have the right surround speaker  
point directly at the front left speaker. If possible,  
Front Left/Right Speakers  
The recommended placement for front left/right  
speakers is at the 30-degree position with reference  
to the center channel speaker. The distance between  
them should be about the same as the distance from the  
center channel speaker to the prime listening position.  
In a 7.1 system, you should place the main surround  
left/right speakers at the 90-degree point on our cir-  
20 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
cle. A good way to visualize proper surround speaker  
positioning for 7.1 is to place the speakers directly to  
the left and right of the ears of someone sitting in the  
prime listening spot. The two speakers should ideally  
face toward each other.  
NOTES ON SPEAKER PLACEMENT:  
3. Carefully remove the protective plastic film from  
the front-panel lens. If left in place, the film will  
prevent proper operation of the remote control.  
1. The limitations of your listening room, including the  
placement of walls and furniture, may make it diffi-  
cult to follow the speaker placement suggestions  
shown above. Depending on the specific layout of  
the room, here are some ways to compensate for  
unusual conditions:  
4. Install the four supplied AAA batteries in the  
main remote as shown. Be certain to follow the  
(+) and (–) polarity indicators that are in the  
battery compartment. (The ZR10 remote  
requires two AAA batteries.)  
The additional Surround Back Left/Right speakers are  
placed at about 150 degrees on the circle, pointing  
inward, toward the listening area. The easiest way to  
visualize the placement of these speakers is to place  
the surround back left speaker directly opposite the  
right front speaker and to place the surround back left  
speaker directly opposite the left front speaker.  
• Try to follow the suggested placement, but move  
the speakers within a few feet from the preferred  
locations.  
• Regardless of where they are placed, always try  
to make certain that the main surround speakers  
are the same distance from the front speakers.  
(For example, try not to have the right surround  
speaker further back into the room than the left  
surround speaker.)  
Video Screen  
Center Speaker  
Front Right  
Speaker  
30°  
Front Left  
Speaker  
30°  
5. Turn the AVR 445 on either by pressing the  
Standby/On Switch 1 on the front panel, or  
via the remote by pressing the Power On Button  
• If it is not possible to wall-mount or place speak-  
ers on a shelf, consider the use of optional floor  
stands, available for many speakers.  
90°  
90°  
b, the AVR Selector e  
ç
or any of the  
150°  
150°  
Input Selectors 3Xhç∂ƒ  
≠® on the remote. The lighting around the  
Standby/On Switch 1 will turn blue to confirm  
that the unit is on.  
2. When using ceiling-mounted in-wall speakers, fol-  
low the same guidelines shown for conventional  
floorstanding or shelf-mounted speakers.  
Side Surround  
Right Speaker  
Side Surround  
Left Speaker  
System Setup  
Using the On-Screen Display  
Once the speakers have been placed in the room and  
connected, the remaining steps in the setup process  
are to assign input and output connections, make any  
video or audio adjustments, select a surround mode,  
program the AVR 445’s bass management system for  
the type of speakers used in your system, calibrate  
the output levels and set the delay times used by the  
surround sound processor.  
When making the following adjustments, you may  
find it easier to use the AVR 445’s on-screen display  
system. These easy-to-read displays give you a clear  
picture of the current status of the unit and make it  
easy to see which speaker, delay, input or digital  
selection you are making.  
Back Surround  
Left Speaker  
Back Surround  
Right Speaker  
7.1 Placement Diagram  
Subwoofer Placement  
Since subwoofers produce nondirectional sound, they  
may be placed almost anywhere in a room. Actual  
placement should be based on room size and shape  
and the type of subwoofer used. One method of find-  
ing the optimal location for a subwoofer is to begin by  
placing it in the front of the room, about six inches  
from a wall, or near the front corner of the room.  
To view the on-screen menus, make certain that you  
have made a video connection to the appropriate  
matching input of your TV or projector. In order to view  
the AVR 445’s displays, the correct video source must  
be selected on the video display. On-screen menus  
may be viewed through component, S-video or com-  
posite video connections, but they are not available  
when an HDMI source is selected as the input or  
through the HDMI Output K.  
Although it is necessary to assign input/output settings  
and surround mode choices manually, we recommend  
that you take advantage of the power and precision of  
EzSet/EQ to automatically select and enter the settings  
for all other audio parameters. This will not only save  
you time; it will ensure that your room is calibrated and  
equalized with an accuracy not possible when these  
settings are made manually.  
Another method is to temporarily place the subwoofer  
at your normal listening position, and then walk  
around the room until you find a spot where the sub-  
woofer sounds best. Place the subwoofer in that spot.  
You should also follow the instructions of the subwoofer’s  
manufacturer, or you may wish to experiment with  
the best location for a subwoofer in your particular  
listening room.  
You are now ready to power up the AVR 445 to begin  
these final adjustments.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: When viewing the on-screen  
menus using a CRT-based projector, plasma display or  
direct-view CRT monitor or television, it is important that  
they not be left on for an extended period of time. The  
constant display of a static image such as these menus  
may cause the image to be permanently “burned into”  
the projection tubes, plasma screen or CRT display.  
This type of damage is not covered by the AVR 445  
warranty and may not be covered by the projector/TV  
set’s warranty.  
1. Make certain that the AC power cord is firmly  
inserted into the AC Power Cord Socket I  
and plug the cord into an unswitched AC outlet.  
To maintain the unit’s safety rating, DO NOT  
substitute the power cord for one with lower  
current capacity.  
For more information on subwoofer placement, as well  
as a variety of topics relating to audio and home the-  
ater, visit the Technology section of our Web site at  
informative white papers written by the acoustic and  
electronics experts at Harman Kardon and at our par-  
ent company, Harman International Industries, Inc.  
2. Press the Main Power Switch A located  
behind the Front-Panel Control Door 9 in  
until it latches and the word “OFF” on the top of  
the switch disappears inside the front panel. Note  
that the illumination around the Standby/On  
Switch 1 will turn amber, indicating that the  
unit is in the Standby mode.  
The AVR 445 has two on-screen display modes,  
“Semi-OSD” and “Full-OSD.” When making configura-  
tion adjustments, it is recommended that the full-OSD  
mode be used. This will place an easily viewed list of  
the available options on the screen.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Making Configuration Adjustments  
The full-OSD system is available by pressing the  
Setting the System Configuration Memory  
When any input other than the tuner, 8-channel inputs  
or the USB input, is selected as the source, you have  
the option of renaming the input as it appears in the  
on-screen and front-panel messages. This is helpful if  
you wish to associate a specific product brand name  
with the input, or to simply enter any name that will  
help you to remember which source is being selected.  
The AVR 445 features an advanced memory system  
that enables you to establish different configurations  
for the component video assignment, digital input and  
surround mode and other settings for each input  
source. This flexibility enables you to customize the  
way in which you listen to each source and have the  
AVR 445 memorize those settings. Once these set-  
tings are made, they will automatically be recalled  
whenever you select that input.  
OSD Button U  
. When this button is pressed,  
the MASTERMENU(Figure 1) will appear, and  
adjustments are made from the individual menus.  
**  
MASTER  
MENU  
**  
IN/OUT SETUP  
AUDIO ADJUST  
SURROUND SETUP  
EZSET/EQ  
To change the input name, press the /¤ Navigation  
Buttons D  
is pointing to TITLE. Next, press and hold the  
Set Button p for a few seconds until a flashing  
box appears to the right of the colon. Immediately  
release the Set Button p , as you are now  
ready to enter the device name.  
Press the /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
©
on the remote so that the cursor  
MULTI-ROOM  
ADVANCED  
To simplify initial configuration and operation, the  
AVR 445 has been preconfigured with input settings  
that are typical for home theater systems. These set-  
tings are detailed in the worksheets in the Appendix.  
Before adjusting the input settings, it is a good idea to  
compare your input connections to the defaults so that  
you may see where changes need to be made.  
œ
œ
Figure 1  
©
and  
The semi-OSD system is also available, allowing you  
to make adjustments directly, by pressing the appro-  
priate buttons on the front panel or remote control for  
the specific parameter to be adjusted. For example, to  
change the digital input for any of the sources, press  
note that alphanumeric characters will appear with  
the start of the alphabet in capital letters, followed by  
the lowercase letters, and then numbers and symbols.  
When you press the ¤ Navigation Button D  
Before using the unit, you may want to change the  
settings for some inputs so that they are properly  
configured to reflect the use of digital or analog  
inputs, the type of video display and speakers  
installed, and the surround mode specifics of your  
home theater system.  
©, the symbols and numbers will appear first,  
the Digital Select Button o and then press the  
followed by a reverse list of the alphabet in lowercase  
letters. Press the button either way until the first  
letter of the desired name appears. If you wish to  
enter a blank space as the first character, press the  
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Button  
n
to scroll through the  
list of options as they appear in the on-screen display  
or in the Lower Display Line $.  
In/Out Setup  
Navigation Button D  
When the desired character appears, press the ›  
Navigation Button D and repeat the process  
for the next letter, and continue until the desired name  
is entered, up to a maximum of 14 characters. Press  
©.  
Semi-OSD messages are available only when a 480i  
input source is being viewed. They are not available  
when a 480p, 720p or 1080i source or an HDMI  
input is selected.  
The first step is to configure each input source. When  
an input is selected, the settings will “attach” them-  
selves to that input and be stored in a nonvolatile  
memory. Once made, the selection of an input will  
automatically recall those settings. For that reason, the  
procedures described below must be repeated for  
each input source so that you have the opportunity  
to customize each source to your specific listening  
requirements. However, once done, they need not  
be changed again unless your system components  
have changed.  
©
To use the full-OSD menu system, press the OSD  
the Set Button p  
œ
to enter the input name into  
Button U  
. When the menu is on the screen,  
the system memory and to proceed with the configu-  
ration process.  
⁄ ¤  
/
press the  
on-screen cursor is next to the item you wish to  
adjust, and then press the Set Button p to  
Navigation Button n  
©
until the  
After entering the input title, press the /¤  
œ
Navigation Buttons D  
©
to move to the  
adjust that item. The menus will remain on the screen  
for 20 seconds, and then they will “time-out” and dis-  
appear from the screen. The time-out may be  
increased to as much as 50 seconds by going to the  
ADVANCEDmenu, and changing the item titled  
FULLOSDTIMEOUT.  
next line.  
The audio input defaults are shown in the table in the  
Appendix. If your system configuration follows the  
default table, no changes are needed and you may  
When using the full-OSD system to make the setup  
adjustments, press the OSD Button U  
so that the MASTERMENU(Figure 1) appears.  
The cursor will be next to the IN/OUTSETUP  
line. Press the Set Button p  
once  
press the /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
©
to  
move to the next line.  
When the full-OSD system is in use, the menu selec-  
tions are not shown in the Upper or Lower Display  
Lines #$. When the full-OSD menu system is  
used, OSDONwill appear in the Upper Display  
Line # to remind you that a video display must be  
used. When the semi-OSD system is used in conjunc-  
tion with the discrete configuration buttons, the on-  
screen display will show two lines of text with the cur-  
rent menu selection. That selection will also be shown  
in the Upper or Lower Display Lines #$,  
depending on which parameter is being adjusted.  
œ
and the first page  
With the cursor pointing to AUDIOIN-PORT,  
press the /Navigation Buttons D to  
of the IN/OUTSETUPmenu (Figure 2) will  
appear on the screen. Press the /Navigation  
©
change the default to a different audio input connection.  
When the name of the desired input appears, press  
Button D  
©
until the desired input name appears  
in the highlighted video, as well as being indicated in  
the front-panel Input Indicators !.  
the /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
©
to move  
to the next line.  
In normal operation, when a digital audio stream is  
interrupted, the unit will automatically switch to the  
analog inputs associated with that source. This is par-  
ticularly useful with cable set-top boxes where the  
input is normally digital, but occasionally changes to  
analog. If you wish to configure an input so that the  
auto-poll circuit is turned off, while the on-screen cur-  
sor is pointing to the AUDIOAUTOPOLL  
line, simply press the /Navigation Buttons  
*
IN/OUT SETUP  
*
SOURCE: VIDEO  
TITLE:  
1
AUDIO IN-PORT: ANALOG  
AUDIO AUTO POLL: OFF ON  
VIDEO IN PORT: AUTO  
COMPONENT INPUT: COMP  
1
VIDEO PROCESS:  
A/V SYNC DELAY:  
V
CONVER  
0
mS  
2
MASTER MENU  
PAGE  
Figure 2  
D©  
so that OFF(rather than ON) is highlighted.  
22 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
When the desired auto-poll setting is entered, press  
put settings. If all settings for input configuration are  
complete, press the /¤ Navigation Buttons  
The default setting of V-CONVERSIONwill  
output the incoming video in one of the following ways,  
depending on the input source.  
the /¤ Navigation Button D  
©
to move to  
the next line.  
D
©
until the on-screen cursor is pointing to  
MASTERMENUand then press the Set Button  
to return to the main menu screen.  
When the cursor is at the VIDEOIN-PORT  
line, you are able to select an alternative to the default  
input setting for the video input associated with any  
source except HDMI 1 and HDMI 2. For the Video 1  
and Video 4 inputs, the factory default of AUTOwill  
select either composite or S-video, depending on  
which has an active signal. For the Video 2, Video 3  
and DVD inputs, the AUTOsetting will normally  
select the default component input, but if it is not  
in use, the system will revert to a composite or  
S-video output if either one is active. You may set  
COMPONENTINPUTto OFFif you  
aren’t using component video, and the AVR will not  
select the component video inputs.  
• A standard-definition (480i) analog signal (composite,  
S-video or component) will be converted so that it is  
available at its input resolution, at the standard com-  
posite, S-video or component analog video outputs.  
The signal will also be available at the record outputs.  
pœ  
The second page of the IN/OUTSETUP  
menu (Figure 3) allows you to further configure the  
AVR 445 for special custom features.  
• An analog component high-definition signal will  
be output at its input resolution as an analog com-  
ponent signal, but not through the analog composite  
or S-video monitor, or HDMI or record outputs.  
*
IN/OUT  
SETUP  
*
VIDEO :IN  
4
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
:ANALOG  
MASTER  
MENU  
PAGE  
1
• HDMI input signals, regardless of their resolution, will  
be output through the HDMI outputs only.  
The BYPASSsetting will not apply any video  
conversion to the incoming video signal, but it will  
output it in one of the following ways, depending on  
the input source.  
To have the AVR always look to a specific source con-  
nection when an input is selected, make certain that  
the on-screen cursor is pointing to the VIDEO  
IN-PORTline; then press the /Navigation  
Figure 3  
An exclusive Harman Kardon feature is the ability to  
switch the front-panel analog audio/video jacks from  
their normal use as inputs to output connections  
so that portable recording devices may easily be  
connected.  
• Analog signals (composite, S-video or component)  
will output only in the resolution and format that  
matches the input for both the main “Monitor” con-  
nection as well as for the record outputs.  
Buttons D  
©
until the name of the desired input  
appears. Note that this setting is not available when  
the HDMI inputs are selected. The choice of available  
inputs may vary according to whether an audio-only  
source (such as the tuner, CD or tape) or an audio/  
video source (such as Video 1–Video 4 or DVD) is  
selected.  
• HDMI input signals, regardless of their resolution, will  
be output through the HDMI outputs only.  
The front-panel analog Video 4 Jacks N are nor-  
mally set as inputs for use with camcorders, video  
games and other portable audio/video products, but  
they may be switched to outputs. First, make certain  
that you are at the second page of the IN/OUT  
After any needed change to the video conversion set-  
ting has been made, press the /¤ Navigation  
Buttons D  
©
to move to the next line.  
When the desired video input setting has been made,  
¤
SETUPmenu. Press the Navigation Buttons  
At the A/VSYNCDELAYline, you are able  
to enter a setting that delays the audio output slightly  
behind the video so that the loss of lip sync that may  
occur due to digital video processing in the transmis-  
sion of a program, in the playback unit or in the dis-  
play is corrected. This lack of lip sync is not a fault of  
the sources; rather, it is a by-product of video signal  
processing. In most cases, we recommend that the  
delay adjustment be made using the direct-access  
controls on the remote so that you may more accu-  
rately adjust the delay while viewing the on-screen  
image, following the instructions shown on page 30,  
but you may also make it here using the menu sys-  
tem. As the amount of delay needed may vary from  
one source to another, we strongly recommend that  
you adjust it for each input.  
press the /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
©
to  
D
line. Press the  
©
until the cursor points to the VIDEO4  
move to the next line.  
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Buttons D©  
If your system includes any sources that are equipped  
with Y/Pr/Pb component video outputs, the AVR 445  
is able to switch them to send the proper signals to  
your video display. Each of the Component Video  
Inputs O is assigned to a default source, as shown  
in the table in the Appendix, but if you have connected  
your system differently than the factory settings, you  
may select any of the three inputs for any source  
except the HDMI inputs or the Tuner. If you do not  
need to change these defaults, press the ¤  
so that the word OUTis highlighted. The Input/  
Output Status Indicator M between the S- and  
composite video jacks will turn red, indicating that the  
analog Video 4 jacks are now record outputs.  
NOTE: Selection of the front-panel jacks as outputs  
will remain effective as long as the AVR 445 is on.  
Once the unit is turned off, the jacks will revert to their  
normal use as inputs when the unit is turned on again.  
The RECOUTline enables you to select the  
audio output at the analog record outputs for the input  
Navigation Button D to go to the next setting.  
‹ ›  
/
source being configured. Press the  
Navigation  
To change the Component Video assignment, first  
make certain that the cursor is pointing to the  
COMPONENTINPUTline on the menu  
screen, and then press the /Navigation Button  
Buttons D  
©
to choose one of the following (the  
default setting is ANALOG):  
To adjust the A/V sync delay time from the  
ANALOGselects an unprocessed pass-through  
of an analog source and is the default setting for  
most inputs.  
IN/OUTSETUPmenu, make certain that the  
cursor is pointing to the A/VSYNCDELAY  
line, and then press the /Navigation Buttons  
D
©
until the desired input is highlighted.  
When the desired component input has been selected,  
or component video has been disabled by selecting  
DSPDOWNMIXselects a two-channel down-  
mix of a multichannel digital input.  
D
©
until the desired amount of delay is applied  
OFF, press the ¤ Navigation Button D  
©
so that the on-screen video matches the audio.  
to go to the next setting.  
When all configuration adjustments on this menu  
screen have been made, press the /¤ Navigation  
At the VIDEOPROCESSline, you are able  
to select whether video format conversion is to be  
used with the input source being configured. If you  
do not need to change the setting, simply press the  
Buttons D  
ing to PAGE2and then press the Set Button  
to move to the second screen of input/out-  
©
until the on-screen cursor is point-  
pœ  
/¤ Navigation Buttons D  
©
to continue.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
When all settings on this page are complete, press  
audio data through the DSP at its native sample rate.  
To process incoming 44.1kHz signals at a higher  
resolution, upsampled 96kHz sample rate, press the  
Surround Setup  
⁄ ¤  
the  
on-screen cursor is pointing to PAGE1and then  
press the Set Button p to return to the main  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
until the  
The next step is to set the surround mode you wish  
to use with the input that was previously selected in  
the IN/OUTSETUPmenu. Since surround  
modes are a matter of personal taste, feel free to  
select any mode you wish – you may change it later.  
However, to make it easier to establish the initial  
parameters for the AVR 445, we suggest Logic 7  
(Cinema or Music) for most analog inputs. For inputs  
such as a CD Player, Tape Deck or Tuner, you may  
wish to set the mode to Stereo (“Surround Off”), as  
they are not typically used with multichannel program  
material, and it is unlikely that surround-encoded mate-  
rial will be used. Alternatively, the Logic 7 Music mode  
is a good choice for stereo-only source material. See  
page 58 for information on surround modes.  
œ
/Navigation Buttons D  
96kHzappears.  
©
once so that  
IN/OUTSETUPmenu to configure another  
input, or if no further input configuration adjustments  
⁄ ¤  
When the desired setting has been made, or if no  
are needed, press the  
/
Navigation Buttons  
⁄ ¤  
/
adjustment is required at this line, press the  
D
©
until the on-screen cursor is pointing to  
MASTERMENUand then press the Set Button  
to return to the main menu screen.  
Navigation Buttons D  
©
to move to the next  
configuration line.  
pœ  
The SURRMODEand SURRSELECT  
lines are related, as they guide you to the choice of  
the surround mode that will be activated whenever the  
input being configured is selected.  
Audio Setup  
This menu allows you to configure the tone controls.  
If you do not wish to change any of those settings at  
this time, proceed to the next menu screen. To make  
configuration changes to those parameters, first make  
certain that the MASTERMENUis on screen  
with the cursor pointing to the AUDIOSETUP  
At the SURRMODEline, press the /›  
Navigation Buttons D  
©
to select the surround  
mode group (such as Dolby modes, DTS modes,  
Logic 7 modes, and DSP or Stereo modes) that is  
applicable to the input source. After making a selec-  
For digital program material, the AVR will always exam-  
ine the data stream and automatically select a Dolby  
Digital or DTS mode, as applicable.  
line, and press the Set Button pœ. The  
⁄ ¤  
/
tion, press the  
Navigation Buttons D©  
AUDIOSETUPmenu (Figure 4) will appear.  
to move to the SURRSELECTline.  
To begin the surround setup process, from the  
⁄ ¤  
*
AUDIO  
SETUP  
IN OUT  
*
MASTERMENU(Figure 1), press the  
Navigation Buttons D  
to the SURROUNDSETUPline. Press the  
Set Button p until the SURROUND  
SETUPmenu (Figure 5) is on the screen.  
/
At the SURRSELECTline, you are able to  
choose the specific mode to be used from within the  
major surround mode group. The choice of modes is  
governed by the input type (as some modes such as  
Dolby Digital or DTS-ES are not available for analog  
sources), as well as by the speaker configuration,  
since some modes are only available when a full 7.1  
speaker complement is present. The full list of avail-  
able modes is detailed in the surround mode chart on  
page 60. Also, you may also use the settings in the  
SURROUNDCONFIGmenus to delete modes  
you do not normally use from the available choices.  
©
until the cursor is next  
TONE  
BASS  
:
:
0
0
TREBLE:  
œ
BACK  
TO  
MASTER  
MENU  
*
SURROUND SETUP  
*
SOURCE: VIDEO  
1
AUDIO IN PORT: ANALOG  
AUDIO IN: PCM 44.1kHz  
ADC SAMPLING: 48kHz  
Figure 4  
SURR MODE: LOGIC  
7
SURR SELECT: MUSIC 5.1  
DEFAULT SURR: ORIGINAL  
SURROUND CONFIG  
The first line controls whether or not the bass/treble  
tone controls are in the signal path. The normal default  
is for them to be in-line, but if you wish to remove  
them from the circuit for “flat” response, first make  
certain that the cursor is pointing to the TONE  
line on the menu and press the /Navigation  
DOLBY SURR SETUP  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
When both a surround mode group and a specific  
surround mode have been selected, press the /¤  
Figure 5  
Navigation Buttons D  
©
to move to the next  
configuration line.  
The first line on the menu allows you to select the  
input for which the specific surround settings will  
be applied. Press the /Navigation Buttons  
Buttons D  
©
so that OUTis highlighted.  
The DEFAULTSURRmode line is where you  
choose the mode that is activated when a digital  
source is selected. LASTwill activate the last-used  
mode for any digital source. If you prefer to always  
have a digital source switch to the specific mode  
encoded by digital data flags in the incoming audio  
data stream, press the /Navigation Buttons  
If you wish to leave the tone controls in the signal  
path, the amount off boost or cut for bass and treble  
may be adjusted up to 10dB in 2dB steps by press-  
ing the /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
that the cursor is next to BASSor TREBLE,  
depending on which setting you wish to adjust. Next,  
press the /Navigation Buttons D  
the desired setting is shown.  
D
©
to select the input source to be configured.  
The AUDIOIN-PORTand AUDIOIN  
lines are for display only and may not be changed  
through the SURROUNDSETUPmenu. The  
AUDIOIN-PORTdisplays the physical con-  
nection source for the current active input, and the  
AUDIOINline shows the signal type present.  
Note that an UNLOCKmessage in the AUDIO  
INline indicates that a digital input has been selected  
for that source, but that no data stream is present.  
©
so  
©
until  
D
©
so that ORIGINALappears.  
Before proceeding to the SURROUNDCONFIG  
line, it is worth noting that the settings in the sub-  
menus attached to that line may require a consider-  
able amount of time to complete. Although they are  
useful in that they allow you to customize the list of  
surround modes that appear in normal use of the AVR,  
you may wish to bypass those settings at this time so  
that you may complete the configuration process. You  
may return to this menu line at a later time, once you  
have had a chance to listen to the various surround  
modes and determine which you want to “keep” and  
which you do not want to use. The settings in this line  
When all desired changes have been made on this  
menu, press the /¤ Navigation Buttons  
D
©
so that the cursor is next to the BACK  
TOMASTERMENUline; press the Set  
Button p  
When the input selection has been made, press the  
œ
.
/¤ Navigation Buttons D  
©
to move to  
the next configuration line.  
The ADCSAMPLINGline is where you deter-  
mine whether the unit’s upsampling feature is turned  
on or off. The default setting of 48kHzputs the  
feature in a bypass, or “off,” mode and will pass digital  
24 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
are not primary controls and do not impact the way  
the AVR “sounds.”  
tichannel Dolby Digital, encoded source is present.  
This includes both the discrete Dolby Digital modes,  
which cannot be turned off, as well as other modes  
which may be applied as post-processing on the  
source and system speaker configuration.  
*
DOLBY SURR SETUP  
*
MODE: DOLBY PLIIx  
MUSIC  
To proceed to the SURROUNDCONFIGline,  
CENTER WIDTH  
DIMENSION:  
:
3
press the /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
©
to  
0
PANORAMA: OFF ON  
move to that line; otherwise, press it again to move  
to the DOLBYSURRSETUPline and skip  
to the instructions for that setting.  
NIGHT: OFF MID MAX  
• The DOLBY2.0CONFIGgroup contains  
the surround modes available when a two-channel  
Dolby Digital-encoded source is present. This includes  
both the discrete Dolby Digital modes, which cannot  
be turned off, as well as other modes which may  
be applied as post-processing on the source and  
system speaker configuration.  
BACK TO SURROUND SETUP  
The SURROUNDCONFIGline is your gate-  
way to a broad range of surround mode configurations.  
Figure 7  
To continue, press the Set Button p  
œ
to go  
With the exception of the Night mode setting, which  
is global and applies to all inputs, the settings on  
this page may be set individually for each input, but  
they are only active when the Dolby Pro Logic II or  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music modes are in use. Press the  
/Navigation Buttons D  
desired Dolby Pro Logic mode for adjustment, and  
then press the /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
to move through the three choices. Press the /›  
to the main SURROUNDCONFIGmenu  
(Figure 6).  
• The DTSCONFIGgroup contains the sur-  
round modes available when a DTS-encoded digital  
source is present. This includes both the discrete  
DTS Digital mode, which cannot be turned off, as  
well as other modes which may be applied as post-  
processing on the source and system speaker  
configuration.  
** SURROUND CONFIG **  
LOGIC  
7
GLOBAL:OFF  
DOLBY MULTI CONFIG  
DOLBY 2.0 CONFIG  
DTS CONFIG  
©
to select the  
PCM 44.1/48kHz CONFIG  
PCM 96kHz CONFIG  
©
BACK TO SURROUND SETUP  
Navigation Buttons D  
©
to adjust the settings,  
• The PCM44.1/48kHzCONFIG  
group contains the surround modes available when  
a PCM digital data stream is present. This includes  
not only PCM sources from DVD or CD players, but  
also all two-channel analog sources that are in use,  
as they are converted to PCM within the AVR 445.  
The modes available include the proprietary Dolby  
modes (including Dolby Headphone and Dolby  
Virtual Speaker), DTS processing, our own Logic 7  
modes, the conventional “DSP” modes (such as  
“Hall” and “Theater”) and the “Stereo” modes.  
as desired.  
Figure 6  
The three Dolby surround settings are:  
CENTERWIDTH: This setting adjusts the  
balance of the vocal information in the front sound-  
stage between the center and front left/right speak-  
ers. The lower settings spread the center channel  
sound more broadly into the left and right channels.  
A higher number (up to “7”) produces a tighter cen-  
ter channel presentatioin.  
The LOGIC7GLOBALline is the only item  
on this menu page that is menu-specific, and it allows  
you to select whether or not Logic 7 will be the default  
surround mode for any incoming audio signal. The  
default setting is OFF, which chooses the native  
mode. Press the /Navigation Buttons D  
so that ONappears, to activate the global Logic 7  
setting for this input.  
©
DIMENSION: This setting alters the perceived  
depth of the surround field by creating a shallower  
presentation that appears to move sounds toward  
the front of the room, or a deeper presentation  
that appears to move the center of the sound field  
toward the back of the room. The setting of “O” is a  
neutral default, with the range of adjustment shown  
as “R-3” for a deeper, rear-oriented sound to “F-3”  
for a shallower, front-oriented sound.  
• The PCM96kHzCONFIGgroup contains  
the surround modes available when a PCM digital  
data stream is present. This includes not only 96kHz  
PCM sources from DVD or CD players, but also all  
two-channel analog sources when 96kHzis  
chosen in the ADCSAMPLINGmode line in  
the SURROUNDSETUPmenu. Available  
modes include proprietary Dolby modes (including  
Dolby Headphone and Dolby Virtual Speaker), DTS  
processing, our own Logic 7 modes, the conven-  
tional “DSP” modes (such as “Hall” and “Theater”)  
and the “Stereo” modes.  
The remaining five items in this menu each take you  
to a submenu listing the individual surround modes  
available within the selected mode group. To select  
a surround mode list, press the /¤ Navigation  
Buttons D  
ing to the desired mode, and then press the Set  
Button p . Within each menu, press the  
/¤ Navigation Buttons D to move the  
cursor up and down through the list, and then press  
©
until the on-screen cursor is point-  
œ
©
PANORAMA: Switch this setting to ONto  
add an enveloping presentation that increases the  
perception of sound along the sides of the room.  
When any needed adjustments to the parameter set-  
tings for the Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Music modes have been made, or if no adjustment  
to those settings are required, press the /¤  
the /Navigation Buttons D  
mode “ON” or “OFF.”  
©
to turn the  
• When a mode is ON, the mode will appear in all  
menu selections whenever you are changing the  
surround mode.  
When all surround modes that are not required  
have been turned off, press the /¤ Navigation  
Buttons D  
ing to BACKTOSURROUNDCONFIG;  
then press the Set Button p  
©
until the on-screen cursor is point-  
• When a mode is OFF, the mode will not appear  
and may not be selected for any source.  
Navigation Buttons D  
last line on the menu.  
©
to move to the  
œ
.
• Some modes (e.g., Dolby Digital, DTS and the  
Stereo mode in the PCM menus) should never be  
disabled.  
The final item on the SURROUNDSETUP  
menu is the DOLBYSURRSETUPline.  
When the on-screen cursor is at this line, press  
The NIGHTline adjusts the settings for the Night  
mode, which is only available when specially encoded  
Dolby Digital sources are being played.  
A complete list of the AVR 445’s surround modes is  
found on page 58, but here are some items that will  
help you decide which modes you want included in  
your setup, and which modes you may wish to turn off.  
the Set Button p  
œ
to bring the DOLBY  
The Night mode is a feature of Dolby Digital that uses  
special processing to preserve the dynamic range and  
full intelligibility of a movie soundtrack, while reducing  
the peak level. This prevents abruptly loud transitions  
from disturbing others, without reducing the sonic  
impact of a digital source.  
SURROUNDmenu (Figure 7) up on  
the screen.  
• The DOLBYMULTICONFIGgroup  
contains the surround modes available when a mul-  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
To adjust the Night mode setting, make certain that  
the cursor is on the NIGHTline of the DOLBY  
menu. Next, press /Navigation Buttons  
We recommend that you take advantage of the preci-  
listed above, press the ¤ Navigation Button  
to point the cursor to EZSET/EQ  
MANUALSETUPand then press the Set  
Button p . Once the EZSET/EQ  
MANUALSETUPmenu (Fig. 18) appears,  
follow the instructions on page 29 to enter  
your desired settings for the speaker size or  
Crossover Frequencies, and then return to the  
EZSET/EQMAINmenu. Press the ¤  
sion of EzSet/EQ to calibrate your system, but if  
desired you may also make any of the configuration  
settings manually, or trim the settings provided by  
EzSet/EQ by following the instructions on pages 28–33.  
n©  
D
©
to choose between the following settings,  
œ
as they appear in the on-screen display:  
OFF: When OFFis shown, the Night mode will  
not function.  
Before starting the EzSet/EQ process, make certain  
that you have connected all speakers for your system  
and that you have both the EzSet/EQ microphone and  
the extender rod handy. If you have a standard camera  
tripod, attach the extender rod to the tripod, and then  
screw the microphone to the top of the rod. Place the  
tripod at your primary listening position, at least three  
feet from the nearest hard surface and adjust it so that  
microphone is at or above ear level. If you do not  
have a tripod, simply screw the extender rod into the  
bottom of the EzSet/EQ microphone.  
MID: When MIDis shown, a mild compression  
will be applied.  
Navigation Button n  
is pointing to MANUALEQDESIGNand  
then press the Set Button p . When the  
©
again so that the cursor  
MAX: When MAXis shown, a more severe com-  
pression algorithm will be applied.  
œ
interim message screen appears to remind you  
to set the crossovers, make sure that the cursor  
is pointing to CONTINUEand press the  
We recommend that you select the MIDsetting as  
a starting point and change to the MAXsetting later,  
if desired.  
Set Button pœ  
again since you have  
When all settings on the DOLBYSURR  
already set the crossovers.  
SETUPmenu are compete, press the /¤  
Next, plug the microphone into the EzSet/EQ  
Microphone Jack J located behind the Front  
Panel Control Door 9.  
Step 3. The FARFIELDMEASUREscreen  
(Figure 9) will appear with instructions to place the  
microphone, if you have not already done so. This  
screen is also the place to set the master volume  
level. As noted on the screen, use the Volume  
Navigation Buttons D  
to BACKTOSURROUNDSETUPand  
press the Set Button p . You may then make  
©
until the cursor is next  
œ
You are now ready to start the EzSet/EQ process by  
following these steps:  
any additional changes to the available options from  
that screen, or use /¤ Navigation Buttons  
Step 1. Navigate to the EZSET/EQMAIN  
menu (Fig. 8) by first pressing the OSD Button  
Control )r  
–35dB, as shown on the line that appears at the  
bottom of the menu when the volume is adjusted.  
Press the Set Button p  
set to the proper level.  
˙
to adjust the volume level to  
D
©
to move the cursor to the BACKTO  
SURROUNDCONFIGmenu; press the Set  
Button p again to back up one menu.  
U
on the remote. Press the ¤ Navigation  
Button n until the cursor is pointing to  
EZSET/EQin the MASTERMENU. Press  
œ
©
œ
when the volume is  
At the main SURROUNDSETUPmenu, you  
may change the SOURCEto make adjustments  
to another input, or when all input sources have been  
configured, use /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
to move the cursor to the BACKTOMASTER  
MENUand press the Set Button p  
return to the main menu so that you may move to  
the next step in configuring your AVR 445.  
the Set Button p  
œ
to bring the new menu to  
* FAR FIELD MEASURE *  
Place mic at ear level  
near the listening  
position at least 3ft/  
1m from any hard  
surface.  
the screen.  
©
*
EZSET/EQ  
MAIN  
*
œ
to  
Select  
activity:  
Set volume to -35dB  
CONTINUE  
AUTOMATIC  
MANUAL EQ  
EZSET/EQ  
EQ  
DESIGN  
BACK TO EZSET/EQ MAIN  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
VOLUME: -35dB  
DESIGN  
MANUAL  
SETUP  
MENU  
Using EzSet/EQ  
BACK  
TO  
MASTER  
The AVR 445 uses Harman Kardon’s EzSet/EQ tech-  
nology to automatically configure your system to deliver  
the best possible performance based on your specific  
speaker selection, where the speakers are placed in  
the room and the acoustic influences in your listening  
room. By using a series of test signals and the pro-  
cessing power of the Texas InstrumentsDA 610 digital  
signal processor, EzSet/EQ eliminates the need for  
manual adjustment of speaker “size, crossover, delay  
and output level settings while it adds the power of  
proprietary algorithms and configurable digital filters  
to deliver optimal sound reproduction.  
Figure 9  
Step 4. The final menu screen before the EzSet/EQ  
process starts is a warning screen (Figure 10) that  
serves as a reminder to keep the room as quiet as  
possible while the system is in use. Extraneous noise  
of any kind may adversely affect the accuracy of the  
system’s results. Do not talk while the test tones are  
circulating, and if possible, turn off any ventilation sys-  
tems if the noise form the air flow is loud enough for  
you to hear. Should an outside noise such as a phone  
ringing occur during the test process, we recommend  
that you rerun EzSet/EQ. If you do not wish to start  
the test process at this time, press the /¤  
Navigation Button n  
EZSET/EQMAINmenu or the MASTER  
MENU, and press the Set Button p . To  
begin the EzSet/EQ Near Field measurements, press  
the /Navigation Button n so that ON  
is highlighted, and press the Set Button p  
Figure 8  
Step 2. Select one of the two options shown based  
on the way you wish to have the system settings  
entered:  
• In most cases, you will want to use the Automatic  
mode, which calibrates the system for speaker pres-  
ence, speaker “size, speaker crossover, channel  
output level, speaker-to-listener delay time and  
room equalization. To choose this mode simply  
press the Set Button p  
already pointing to AUTOMATIC EQ  
DESIGNwhen the menu appears on the  
In addition to making system setup quick and easy,  
EzSet/EQ is more precise than manual settings. With  
EzSet/EQ you are able to calibrate your system in a  
fraction of the time it would take to enter the settings  
manually, and with results that rival those achieved with  
expensive test equipment and time consuming proce-  
dures. The end result is a system calibration profile  
that enables your new receiver to deliver the best pos-  
sible sound no matter what type of speakers you have  
or what the properties of your listening room are.  
œ, as the cursor is  
©
to return to either the  
screen. Then press the Set Button p  
when the AUTOMATICEZSET/EQ  
menu appears, to continue to Step 3.  
œ
again  
œ
©
œ
.
If you wish to enter the speaker size or crossover  
frequencies yourself, but want to have the EzSet/EQ  
system test for and calibrate all the other functions  
26 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
NOTE: Once the EzSet/EQ process starts, the volume  
control and Standby/Off switches are temporarily dis-  
abled while the tests are in progress. Do not adjust the  
volume or turn the unit off until you see the on-screen  
message change to indicate that EzSet/EQ is finished.  
* FAR FIELD COMPLETE *  
EQ successful.  
* EZSET/EQ ERROR *  
Speaker config detected  
An overload was  
detected. Please  
verify mic position.  
Reduce the volume by  
6dB and repeat the  
procedure.  
FL  
: YES  
SBR: YES  
SBL: YES  
SL : YES  
SUB: YES  
CEN : YES  
FR  
SR  
: YES  
: YES  
WARNING !!  
DO NEAR FIELD  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
During measurement,  
please maintain silence  
while several sound  
bursts are heard.  
Figure 11  
Figure 13  
START : OFF ON  
If the speaker positions shown match the actual  
speaker layout in your system, confirm that the cursor  
is pointing to DONEARFIELDand press the  
Step 8. When the Far Field measurements are com-  
pleted, the next step is to take three Near Field meas-  
urements, one at each front speaker position. These  
measurements enable EzSet/EQ to produce the most  
accurate settings for high-frequency equalization. The  
Near Field measurements are similar to the Far Field  
tests, except that the system will “listen” to only one  
speaker at a time, rather than sending the test signals  
to all speakers in rotation.  
BACK TO EZSET/EQ MAIN  
Set Button pœ  
to take the Near Field measure-  
Figure 10  
ments from the front left, center and right speakers.  
Continue these instructions with Step 8.  
Step 5. At this point, a series of test tones will circu-  
late among all the speakers in your system. While this  
is happening, the AVR 445 is reading the signal to  
determine which speaker positions are active, what  
type of speaker is present at each active position,  
what the distance is from the listening position to each  
speaker, and to begin to build a profile of the impact of  
the room’s acoustics on the quality of audio reproduc-  
tion. When the tones stop, the system will pause for as  
long as a minute while the processor makes its calcu-  
lations based on the results of the signal measure-  
ments. Do not be alarmed if the “WARNING” message  
remains on the screen after tones stop until a results  
message is displayed, as shown in Step 6 or 7.  
Step 7a. If the measurements are not successful due  
to a missing or malfunctioning speaker, the FAR  
FIELDEQERRORmessage will appear as  
shown in Figure 12. EzSet/EQ is programmed to look  
for speaker pairs at the front left/front right, surround  
left/surround right and surround back left/surround  
back right positions. If the test results indicate that one,  
but not both of the speakers in any of these pairs is  
present, the menu will show NOnext to the speaker  
position where the tests did not report back that a  
speaker is present. Should this message appear, make  
note of the suspect speaker location, exit the menus  
and turn the receiver off. Check all speaker wire con-  
nections and then rerun EzSet/EQ.  
At the NEARFIELDEQSELECTmenu  
(Figure 14) that should be on your screen after com-  
pleting the instructions in Step 6, press the Set  
Button pœ  
to start the near field measure-  
ments with the front left speaker. If you are repeating  
the setup process, you may also use the /¤  
Navigation Buttons n  
©
to select any of the  
three speaker positions shown.  
* NEAR FIELD EQ SELECT *  
Please select  
NOTE: While these tests detect whether a speaker is  
connected to a particular output, they cannot deter-  
mine whether the speaker is in the correct position.  
(For example, it can tell whether a speaker is connected  
to the Surround Right output, but it cannot tell whether  
the speaker is on the right or left side of your listening  
room.) For that reason, we strongly recommend that  
you try to listen carefully to make sure that the test  
tone circulates in a clockwise rotation, starting with the  
front left speaker, to the center, to the front right, and  
so on to the subwoofer. If the tone is heard from a  
speaker that seems as though it is out of sequence,  
such as the tone coming from the surround left speaker  
when the next speaker in the sequence should be the  
surround right speaker, exit the EzSet/EQ system when  
the test sequence is completed and use the manual  
output level tone adjustment process, as outlined on  
page 31, to determine which, if any, speaker is incor-  
rectly connected.  
* FAR FIELD EQ ERROR *  
Detected speaker config  
1. FL Speaker  
2. CEN Speaker  
3. FR Speaker  
FL  
: YES  
SBR: NO  
CEN : YES  
SBL: YES  
SL : YES  
SUB: YES  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
FR  
SR  
: YES  
: NO  
Verify spkr connections  
Verify mic position  
Reduce background noise  
Figure 14  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
At the NEARFIELDMESSAGEmenu,  
you will see an instruction to place the microphone  
in a different position than the one used for the initial  
Far Field measurements. This time, place the micro-  
phone close to the speaker to be measured, at a  
distance of about 2 feet. The top of the microphone  
should be pointed toward the speaker, rather than  
pointing up as was done for the Far Field tests.  
Figure 12  
Step 7b. In some cases, the system may not function  
properly, due to overly high output levels. When this  
occurs, you will see the message shown in Figure 13.  
If you see this message, verify that the microphone is  
in the correct position, and is not too close to any one  
speaker. Then press the Set Button p  
œ
to go  
Press the Set Button p  
œ
to continue.  
back to the MASTERMENU. From there, return  
to the EzSet/EQ system and when you are once again  
at the FARFIELDMEASUREscreen,  
reduce the system volume level by 3dB before trying  
EzSet/EQ again.  
When the test process stops, you will see a message  
indicating that the Far Field measurements are  
complete. If there is an error, follow the instructions  
in Step 7a or Step 7b.  
Step 9. You will now see a WARNINGmessage  
similar to the one shown in Figure 10 except that it will  
contain an option to return to the NEARFIELD  
EQSELECTmenu (Figure 14) as well as the  
ability to return to the MASTERMENU. If you  
are ready to proceed with the test, make certain  
that the microphone is properly pointed toward the  
speaker selected for calibration, at a distance of about  
Step 6. When the Far Field tests are complete, a  
message screen will appear to indicate whether the  
procedure was successful or not. In most cases, there  
will not be any problems and you will see the mes-  
sage shown in Figure 11 on your screen.  
2 feet. Press the Navigation Button n  
©
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
so that ONis highlighted and then press the  
* NEAR FIELD ERROR *  
* EZSET/EQ MANUAL SETUP *  
Set Button p  
œ.  
Near Field EQ was not  
successful.  
EZSET EQ : OFF ON  
EZSET ADJUST  
Step 10. One short test signal will be sent to  
the speaker position being calibrated and after a  
slight pause from the system to calculate the test  
results, you will see either a NEARFIELD  
COMPLETEmessage (Figure 15) or a NEAR  
FIELDERRORmessage (Figure 16). In most  
cases, the COMPLETEmessage will appear, in  
which case you should proceed to Step 11; if an  
ERRORmessage appears, go to Step 12.  
SPEAKER SIZE  
Please check mic  
placement and volume  
setting  
DELAY ADJUST  
CHANNEL ADJUST  
BACK TO EZSET/EQ MAIN  
BACK TO NEAR FIELD  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
Figure 16  
Figure 17  
If you have already run the EzSet/EQ calibration sys-  
tem, the first line of the menu enables you to hear  
the difference between the settings established by  
EzSet/EQ. The default setting is ON, which plays  
the incoming source with the EzSet/EQ settings. To  
hear the system in a Bypass mode, with none of the  
equalization filters in the circuit path, press the /›  
When the measurements have been successfully  
completed, your system is ready for use. Thanks to  
EzSet/EQ, the settings for speaker “size,” speaker  
crossover, channel output and individual channel delay  
time have been automatically set and require no fur-  
ther adjustment. In addition, EzSet/EQ also performs a  
complete room equalization that tailors the system’s  
performance for the best possible sound with your  
combination of speakers, speaker placement and  
room acoustics. The next few pages in this manual  
detail the procedure for manually entering system  
data, but unless you want to view the setting informa-  
tion and make an adjustment, you are now ready to  
enjoy the finest in home theater and music reproduc-  
tion. Go to page 34 for complete information on  
operating your AVR 445.  
Step 11. If the test results were successful, the  
message shown in Figure 15 will appear. To properly  
calibrate the system, you will need to run the Near  
Field tests for all three front channel speakers (left,  
center and right). After running the test for the front  
left speaker, make certain that the cursor is pointing  
toward BACKTONEARFIELDand press  
Navigation Button n  
©
so that OFFis high-  
lighted. Once changed, this setting will remain until  
you change it again in this menu. While you may want  
to use this menu option to hear the difference that  
EzSet/EQ makes, we recommend that you leave  
the setting on to take advantage of the benefits of  
EzSet/EQ’s advanced room correction technology.  
the Set Button p  
œ. You will return to the  
NEARFIELDEQSELECTmenu (Figure  
14), where you should repeat Steps 8 through 11  
until all three front speakers have been calibrated.  
When that is done, the EzSet/EQ process is complete.  
Press the ¤ Navigation Button n  
to the MASTERMENU.  
©
to return  
The EZSETADJUSTline on the menu  
enables you to set the system’s Tilt, or high-frequency  
boost. To make this adjustment, first make sure that  
EZSETEQline is set to ON, as this item is not  
available when EzSet/EQ is not in the signal path.  
To adjust the tilt setting, make sure that the cursor  
is on the EZSETADJUSTline, and press  
the Set Button p  
Navigation Button n  
setting. When you have completed your adjustment,  
press the Navigation Button n to move  
the cursor down to the BACKTOMANUAL  
SETUPline and press the Set Button p  
* NEAR FIELD COMPLETE *  
Manual Setup  
EZSET/EQ has success-  
fully performed  
In most cases it is simpler, easier and more accurate  
to let EzSet/EQ take care of entering the system  
parameters for speaker “size, speaker crossover,  
channel output and individual channel delay time.  
However, if you feel that your listening room or system  
components are best suited to manual entry of these  
settings, the AVR 445 also allows you to enter or trim  
any of these system parameters. Even if you do make  
the settings manually, we recommend that you run the  
EzSet/EQ tests first so that a baseline setting is estab-  
lished, and then make your adjustments from there.  
Note that once EzSet/EQ has been run you do not  
need to adjust all system settings, only those that  
you want to change.  
Near Field EQ for  
the selected speaker.  
BACK TO NEAR FIELD  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
œ. Then press the /›  
©
to enter the desired  
©
Figure 15  
œ
.
Step 12. If a NEARFIELDERRORmes-  
sage appears, as shown in Figure 16, make certain  
that the microphone is about 2 feet from the speaker  
being tested and that the top of the microphone unit  
is pointing toward the speaker. You may also have to  
raise or lower the master volume to achieve accurate  
readings. After checking these two items, as needed,  
make certain that the cursor is pointing to the  
Note on Manual Setup Menus: Each manual setup  
menu (Speaker Size, Delay Adjust and Channel Adjust)  
includes a line that reads EZSETSETTINGS.  
When the default setting of OFFis shown, you are  
able to make any required adjustments that are avail-  
able on that menu. However, you may change the  
setting to ONat any time to recall the settings estab-  
lished when EzSet/EQ was last run. It is also important  
to note that when the EzSet/EQ settings are in use, the  
AVR will not allow any changes to be made. To trim  
the settings, press the /Navigation Button  
To view or change the current settings, press the  
OSD Button U  
the MASTERMENU(Figure 1). Next, press  
the ¤ Navigation Button n as needed  
until the cursor is on the EZSET/EQline,  
and press the Set Button p . Navigate  
to the EZSET/EQMANUALSETUP  
line. Press the Set Button p to view the  
on the remote to bring up  
BACKTONEARFIELDline and press  
the Set Button p  
œ. This will return you to  
©
the NEARFIELDEQSELECTmenu  
(Figure 14) where you should repeat Steps 8 through  
11, adjusting the mike placement and volume level  
as needed until the NEARFIELDCOMPLETE  
menu (Figure 15) appears after the test tone stops.  
œ
n©  
until the cursor is on the EZSET  
SETTINGSline on the menu in use and press  
the /Navigation Button n to change the  
œ
EZSET/EQMANUALSETUPmenu  
(Figure 17).  
©
setting to OFF. This will allow you to make changes  
to the settings on that menu.  
28 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Speaker Size Menu  
to the owner’s manual for a particular speaker, you  
The warning message will remain for a few seconds  
and then the SPEAKERSIZEmenu will return  
to the screen. At this point you may change the set-  
tings to the “size” or crossover for any of the four  
speaker positions using the Navigation Buttons  
should be able to obtain the needed information  
from the Web site or customer service department  
of the speaker’s manufacturer.  
Although most listeners will prefer to take advantage  
of the accuracy and speed of EzSet/EQ to make all of  
the necessary speaker adjustments, advanced users  
may wish to experiment with how different combina-  
tions of settings sound in their home theater environ-  
ment or to use settings other than those calculated  
by EzSet/EQ, to accommodate personal listening  
preferences.  
To manually adjust the speaker settings, go to the  
SPEAKERSIZEmenu by pressing the  
n©  
as shown above. The information below  
details the settings available for each of the speaker  
configurations.  
OSD Button U  
MASTERMENU(Figure 1) appears, press the  
/¤ Navigation Button n until the cursor  
is on the EZSET/EQline and press the Set  
Button p . Navigate to the EZSET/EQ  
MANUALSETUPline and press the Set Button  
. When the EZSET/EQMANUAL  
SETUPmenu (Figure 17) appears, press the  
/¤ Navigation Button n again until the  
cursor is on the SPEAKERSIZEline and  
press the Set Button p  
on the remote and when the  
©
At each of the four speaker position lines, you have  
the option to set the speaker size and crossover. Note  
that the “size” does not refer to the speaker’s actual  
physical size, but rather to the ability of the speaker to  
reproduce low-frequency information. If your speakers  
at any position are traditional full-range models  
capable of handling the full audio spectrum, select  
LARGE. These speakers are called “large” since  
the low-frequency drivers required to play bass without  
strain or distortion are typically eight to fifteen inches  
in diameter, in turn making the speaker cabinet larger  
than those with small (or no) low-frequency drivers.  
When the speakers at a particular position are smaller  
frequency-limited speakers that do not have the ability  
to properly reproduce low-frequency sounds, select  
SMALL.  
The menu system used in your AVR 445 differs  
somewhat from conventional speaker setup menus in  
that it consolidates the speaker “size” and crossover  
into one convenient menu. Even if you are familiar with  
making these adjustments, it is strongly recommended  
that you read the following section of this manual.  
œ
pœ  
©
On the SPEAKERSIZEmenu (Figure 18) you  
have the option to change the type of speaker config-  
ured for each of the four position groups, to change  
the crossover setting for any one of those speakers,  
to adjust the setting point for the low-pass filter that  
determines which frequencies are sent to the sub-  
woofer for low-frequency effects (LFE) signals, to  
change the subwoofer bass redirection mode when  
the Front Left/Right speakers are set to Large and to  
change the setting for the subwoofer size. If, as rec-  
ommended, you have first run the EzSet/EQ system,  
as shown on pages 26–28, the settings established  
by EzSet/EQ will be displayed as a starting point for  
any manual adjustments. You may reestablish those  
settings at any time during an adjustment on this menu  
œ
.
On the SPEAKERSIZEmenu (Figure 18)  
you will see a display of either the settings that  
were established when EzSet/EQ was run, or the  
factory default settings if you have not yet run  
the automated system.  
* SPEAKER SIZE *  
FL/FR  
CENTER  
SL/SR  
:SM - 100Hz  
At all speaker positions except for the front left/right  
speakers, you may also select NONE. This setting  
tells the system that no speakers are present at that  
position, allowing the AVR to select the correct sur-  
round modes that are compatible with the number of  
speakers installed. For example, in order to use the  
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS-ES, Logic 7/7-  
channel and “7 Stereo” modes, you must have either  
LARGEor SMALLentered as the setting for  
the BACKSURRchannels.  
:SM - 100Hz  
:SM - 100Hz  
SBL/SBR  
:SM - 100Hz MULTI  
LFE LP FLT :120Hz  
SUB MODE  
SUB SIZE  
:SUB  
:10in/250mm  
EZSET SETTINGS: OFF  
ON  
BACK TO MANUAL SETUP  
by pressing the /¤ Navigation Button  
until the cursor is on the EZSETSETTINGS  
line of the menu and then pressing the /›  
n©  
Figure 18  
To change the setting for any of the four speaker posi-  
tions, press the /¤ Navigation Button n  
Navigation Button n  
©
so that ONis high-  
©
lighted in reverse video. Note, however, that once this  
is done, any manual adjustments made will be lost and  
must be reentered.  
When LARGEis selected for any channel, a full-  
range signal will be sent to the speaker outputs for  
that channel. For all speaker positions except the front  
left/right, when LARGEis chosen, no derived  
sound will be sent to the subwoofer output, although  
in all cases the special low-frequency effects (LFE)  
signals available on 5.1 or 6.1 digital programs will  
always be sent to the subwoofer output.  
until the cursor points to the line where you wish to  
make the change. Press the /Navigation Button  
n©  
to change the setting, but note that when  
Speaker Size  
you do this for the first time in the menu, a warning  
message (Figure 19) will appear in the on-screen dis-  
play reminding you to rerun EzSet/EQ after you are  
finished with any speaker configuration changes. This  
is necessary to make any level output adjustments  
needed after the setting changes so that the new  
configuration will be properly integrated.  
At each of the four speaker group positions, you have  
the ability to select the speaker “size” and, when a  
“Small” speaker is selected, the frequency below  
which low-frequency information is sent to the sub-  
woofer, as opposed to the speakers for the channel  
being adjusted. For that reason, before making the  
adjustments on the FRONTL/R, CENTER,  
SIDESURRand BACKSURRmenu lines,  
it is important to know the frequency range for the  
speaker. This information is typically found in the  
“Specifications” section of the speaker’s owner’s man-  
ual. If you cannot find the specification for the lowest  
frequency the speaker can handle, start with the set-  
tings entered by running EzSet/EQ and then try one  
setting above or below the existing entry. We do not  
recommend changing the crossover point more than  
that due to the possible impact that will have on the  
speaker’s performance. If you do not have access  
When SMALLis selected for any channel, you may  
also enter a setting for the crossover frequency at  
which sound is divided between the frequency above  
which sound is sent to the channel’s speakers and  
below which sound is sent to the subwoofer. When  
configuring a “small” speaker, choose the setting that  
has the frequency closest to that of the lowest fre-  
quency the speakers in question are capable of han-  
dling. If one of the six available crossover points does  
not match, select the one that is above, but closest to,  
the speaker’s low-frequency limit.  
* X-OVER CHANGE WARNING *  
Speaker X-over Freq or  
Size has been changed.  
Please re-run EZSET/EQ  
Figure 19  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
When there are no speakers available at a specific  
position, select NONE. When this option is chosen  
for the Center or Side Surround speakers, the sound  
that would normally be sent to these channels will be  
split between the front left and right speakers. Note  
that when your system does not include Center or  
Surround speakers, the use of Dolby Virtual Speaker  
as a surround mode may provide a sound field that  
simulates the presence of these speakers. (See the  
appendix for more information on the Dolby Virtual  
Speaker mode.)  
or manually configured as being available, additional  
Select a setting that best matches the diameter of  
your subwoofer’s driver, or which provides the appro-  
priate high-pass filter setting for your system. In each  
case, the frequency of the high-pass filter determines  
the frequencies below which no information is sent to  
the subwoofer:  
options are available to further customize bass redirec-  
tion. To change these settings, first make sure that  
the SPEAKERSIZEmenu (Figure 18) is on  
the screen, and then press the /¤ Navigation  
Button n  
SUBMODE. Press the /Navigation Button  
to begin the selection process, and note that  
©
so that the cursor is pointing to  
• The setting for an 8-inch/200mm driver activates  
a 38Hz subwoofer high-pass filter.  
n©  
a warning message will appear, reminding you to rerun  
EzSet/EQ after all changes have been made.  
• The setting for a 10-inch/250mm driver activates  
a 30Hz subwoofer high-pass filter.  
The following options are available:  
• The setting for a 12-inch/305mm driver activates  
a 20Hz subwoofer high-pass filter.  
Note that when NONEis selected for the Back  
Surround speakers, the 6.1/7.1 channel surround  
modes are not available. When this is the case for  
your system, you may wish to take advantage of the  
availability of the unused amplifier channel pair to  
power a second set of speakers in another room.  
(See page 44 for more information on amplifier  
configuration.)  
• The default setting for Large front left/right speakers  
when a subwoofer is present is SUBL/R+  
LFE. In this mode, all sounds below the crossover  
point set on the LFELPFLTline will be sent  
to BOTH the subwoofer and the front left/right  
speakers.  
• The setting for a 15-inch/380mm driver activates  
a 15Hz subwoofer high-pass filter.  
When all changes to speaker-related settings have  
¤
been made, press the  
until the cursor is on the BACKTO  
MANUALSETUPmenu; then press the Set  
Button p so that you may make any other  
/
Navigation Button  
n©  
• To send only the LFE channel information to the  
subwoofer, but have all other (“derived”) low-  
frequency sounds sent to the front left/right  
speakers, select the SUB(LFE)setting.  
œ
Once any desired changes have been made to the  
speaker size and/or crossover, press the /¤  
adjustments to the system parameters. Remember to  
rerun the EzSet/EQ system if any changes have been  
made to the settings on this menu, following the  
instructions for using the Manual mode shown on  
page 26.  
Navigation Button n  
©
to move the cursor to  
• To have low-frequency information sent to the sub-  
woofer only when Large speakers are selected,  
choose SUB(L/R).This option is only avail-  
able when the unit is set to SURROUNDOFF  
so that a pure analog audio path is provided.  
any other line on this menu to make a setting change,  
or go to the BACKTOMANUALSETUP  
menu and then press the Set Button p  
œ
to  
continue with overall configuration.  
Delay Settings  
Due to the different distances between the listening  
position and each speaker position, the amount of  
time it takes for sound to reach your ears from each  
channel is different. You may compensate for this dif-  
ference through the use of the delay settings to adjust  
the timing for the speaker placement and acoustic  
conditions in your listening room or home theater.  
LFE Low-Pass-Filter Setting  
• When no subwoofer is present and Large speakers  
are configured for the front left/right position, select  
NONE. This will route all low-frequency information  
to the front left/right speakers.  
The LFELPFLTline selects the frequency set-  
ting below which sounds that may be available from a  
special low-frequency effects (LFE) track are sent to  
the subwoofer. In most cases, this setting will be set  
accurately by EzSet/EQ but, should you wish to make  
a change from that setting or the 120Hz frequency  
that is most commonly used in the creation of LFE  
channels by motion picture sound mixers, after making  
sure that the SPEAKERSIZEmenu (Figure  
18) is on the screen, press the /¤ Navigation  
When the SPEAKERSIZEmenu returns to  
the screen, replacing the warning message, press the  
/Navigation Button n  
selection. When the desired setting appears, press the  
/¤ Navigation Button n to move the  
©
to make your  
In most cases, the settings established by EzSet/EQ  
are accurate to under a foot, but the placement of  
the microphone and other factors may influence  
the setting. Should you wish to manually adjust the  
channel delay times, follow the instructions shown  
below. Whenever adjustments to the delay settings are  
made remember that the distance settings need not  
be accurate to the inch, as the system is designed to  
accommodate a typical listening area rather han the  
precise measurement from the speakers to a specific  
“sweet spot” position.  
©
cursor to any other line on this menu where you wish  
to make a setting change, or go to the BACKTO  
MANUALSETUPmenu and then press the  
Button n  
LFELPFLT. Press the /Navigation  
Button n to begin the selection process, and  
©
so that the cursor is pointing to  
Set Button pœ  
to continue with overall  
©
configuration.  
note that a warning message will appear, reminding you  
to rerun EzSet/EQ after all changes have been made.  
Subwoofer Size  
The final setting on the SPEAKERSIZEmenu  
enables you to change the setting for the subwoofer  
size. In the event that EzSet/EQ did not accurately  
enter the correct size, or if you wish to experiment  
with a different setting, first make sure that the  
When the SPEAKERSIZEmenu returns  
to the screen, press the /Navigation Button  
n
©
to make your selection. When the desired  
setting appears, press the /¤ Navigation Button  
to move the cursor to any other line on this  
In addition to providing delaying adjustments for each  
individual speaker position, the AVR 445 allows you to  
adjust the delay for the combined output of all speak-  
ers as a group. This feature is called A/V Sync Delay;  
it allows you to compensate for delays to the video  
image that may be caused by the processing in prod-  
ucts such as digital video displays, video scalers, digital  
cable or satellite systems, or digital video recorders.  
With proper adjustment of the setting for A/V Sync  
Delay, you can eliminate the loss of lip sync that may  
be introduced when video signals are digitized.  
n©  
SPEAKERSIZEmenu (Figure 18) is on  
the screen; then press the /¤ Navigation Button  
menu where you wish to make a setting change, or  
go to the BACKTOMANUALSETUP  
n©  
so that the cursor is pointing to SUB  
SIZEand then press the /Navigation  
Button n to begin the selection process. Note  
menu and then press the Set Button p  
œ
to continue with overall configuration.  
©
Sub Mode Setting  
When the Front Left/Right speakers are configured  
as “Large” and a subwoofer is detected by EzSet/EQ  
that a warning message will appear for 4 seconds to  
remind you to rerun EzSet/EQ after all changes have  
been made.  
30 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
¤
To make any changes to the delay settings, go  
to the DELAYADJUSTsubmenu within the  
EZSET/EQMANUALSETUPmenu  
(Figure 17). To do this, first press the OSD Button  
speaker positions, first using the Navigation  
Button n to change to the next position; then  
Navigation Button n to change  
then press the Set Button p to enter the setting.  
©
‹ ›  
/
¤
The  
Navigation Button n may be used to  
use the  
/
©
select another position, or you may simply wait 5 sec-  
onds for the system to time out and return to normal  
operation.  
the setting. Note that only the speaker positions that  
have been set to LARGEor SMALLin the  
SPEAKERSETUPmenu, as shown on  
page 30, may be adjusted. The appearance of three  
dashes next to a speaker position in place of a dis-  
tance setting indicates that you have not configured an  
active speaker for that location.  
U
so that the MASTERMENU(Figure 1)  
¤
appears. Next, press the  
until the cursor is on the EZSET/EQ  
line and press the Set Button p . Navigate  
to EZSET/EQMANUALSETUPand  
then press the Set Button p . When the  
MANUALSETUPmenu is shown, press the  
/
Navigation Button  
When all changes to the Delay settings have been  
n©  
/
¤
made press the  
Navigation Button n©  
œ
until the cursor is on the BACKTOMANUAL  
SETUPmenu and then pressing the Set Button  
œ
pœ  
so that you may make any other adjust-  
ments to the system parameters. If the changes just  
made complete the manual adjustments needed,  
If you have already run EzSet/EQ, return to the settings  
established by the automated system by pressing the  
¤
/
Navigation Button n  
cursor is on the DELAYADJUSTline and  
press the Set Button p to view the  
©
again until the  
press the OSD Button U  
to exit the menu  
/
¤
Navigation Button n  
©
until the cursor is  
œ
system and resume normal system operation.  
pointing to the EZSETSETTINGSline. Next,  
DELAYADJUSTmenu (Figure 20).  
‹ ›  
/
press the  
Navigation Button n  
©
so that  
Output Level Adjustment  
* DELAY ADJUST *  
ONis highlighted in reverse video. The settings will  
be resent to the values calculated by EzSet/EQ, and  
the menu will be locked so that the settings may not  
be changed. To go back into the menu and make any  
manual changes to one or more channels, you must first  
return the cursor to the EZSETSETTINGS  
‹ ›  
Output level adjustment is a key part of the configura-  
tion of any surround sound product. It is particularly  
important for a digital receiver such as the AVR 445,  
as correct outputs ensure that you hear soundtracks  
with the proper directionality and intensity.  
FL :12.0ft  
CEN:12.0ft  
FR :12.0ft  
SR :10.0ft  
SBR:10.0ft  
SBL:10.0ft  
SL :10.0ft  
SUB:12.0ft  
DELAY RESET: OFF ON  
UNIT: FEET METER  
EZSET SETTINGS  
: OFF ON  
In most cases, you will not need to make any  
adjustments to the output level, as the settings  
made by running EzSet/EQ are as accurate as those  
made manually. However, you are able to use the  
CHANNELADJUSTmenu to trim the settings  
to suit your personal preferences or to configure the  
system so that the output settings are different from  
one input source to another.  
line and press the  
/
Navigation Button n©  
BACK TO MANUAL SETUP  
so that OFFis highlighted in reverse video. This will  
unlock the menu to allow changes.  
Figure 20  
When the delay time for all speaker positions has  
been set, you may return to manual setup by pressing  
Once the DELAYADJUSTmenu is on your  
screen, note that the default for distance settings is in  
feet. If your measurements are in feet, proceed to the  
next step; if your measurements are made in meters,  
¤
/
¤
the  
cursor is pointing to BACKTOMANUAL  
SETUP; then press the Set Button p  
Navigation Button n  
©
until the  
œ
.
press the Navigation Button n  
©
until the  
The ability to make individual output level adjustments  
on a per-input basis is useful for listeners who may  
prefer different settings for the subwoofer or an indi-  
vidual channel group such as the front speakers  
when playing musical selections via the CD input as  
opposed to the movie soundtracks more frequently  
used with the DVD input. This menu also allows you to  
adjust the output levels using external sources such as  
a test disc or other program material that you use as a  
standard, rather than the system’s test tone.  
on-screen cursor is at the UNITline on the menu.  
The delay settings may also be adjusted at any time  
using the main remote control and while viewing an  
on-screen image by pressing the Delay Select  
Button Z. The A/V Sync Delay setting is first, and  
it may be adjusted by pressing the Set Button p  
within five seconds of when the A/VSYNC  
DELAYmessage appears in the on-screen display  
and the Lower Display Line $. Then, press the  
‹ ›  
‹ ›  
/
Then, press the  
Navigation Button n©  
so that METERis highlighted. When the change  
⁄ ¤  
/
in measurement units is made, press the  
Navigation Button n  
©
to return the cursor  
to the FLposition.  
If you wish to reset all delay settings to the factory  
/
¤
defaults, as shown in Figure 20, press the  
/
Navigation Button n to enter the desired  
Navigation Button n until the cursor is point-  
©
delay setting that brings the video and sound back  
in sync. Press the Set Button p again to enter  
the setting.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: Listeners are often confused  
about the operation of the surround channels. While  
some assume that sound should always be coming  
from each speaker, most of the time there will be  
little or no sound in the surround channels. This is  
because they are only used when a movie director or  
sound mixer specifically places sound there to create  
ambience, a special effect or to continue action from  
the front of the room to the rear. When the output  
levels are properly set, it is normal for surround  
speakers to operate only occasionally. Artificially  
increasing the volume to the rear speakers may  
destroy the illusion of an enveloping sound field that  
duplicates the way you hear sound in a movie theater  
or concert hall, even when making manual adjustments.  
ing to the DELAYRESETline. Next, press the  
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Button n  
©
so that ONis  
highlighted. The settings will reset, and you may now  
continue to make any needed changes, following the  
instructions shown below. Once you make the first  
change to the default settings, the setting on the  
DELAYRESETline will return to OFF, indi-  
cating that the factory defaults are no longer in effect.  
Note that the A/V Sync Delay setting is unique to each  
video input source, so you may enter a different set-  
ting to compensate for the differences between any  
product attached to the different inputs.  
To change one of the individual speaker positions  
directly, press the Speaker Select Button a,  
To change the setting, first make sure that the on-  
‹ ›  
screen cursor is pointing to FL, and press the  
Navigation Button n  
/
/
¤
followed by the  
Navigation Button n to  
©
until the distance from  
select the desired position as that name appears in  
the on-screen display and the Lower Display Line  
$. When the name of the speaker position to be  
adjusted appears press the Set Button p within 5  
‹ ›  
the center speaker to the preferred listening position  
¤
is entered. Next, press the Navigation Button  
n©  
to move the cursor to the next line and use  
‹ ›  
/
the  
Navigation Button n  
©
again to enter  
seconds. Press the  
/
Navigation Button n to  
the distance from the main listening position to the  
center speaker. Repeat the procedure for all active  
enter the desired delay setting for that speaker and  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
‹ ›  
Before beginning the output level adjustment process,  
make certain that all speaker connections have been  
properly made. The system volume should be set to the  
level that you will use during a typical listening session.  
We recommend that EzSet/EQ be used when the AVR  
is first installed to establish the initial level settings.  
AVR 445 back on and return to this menu to resume  
/
Navigation Button n  
©
to change the  
the channel adjustment procedure. If any speaker con-  
nections were changed we also recommend that you  
rerun EzSet/EQ before making any manual calibration  
adjustments.  
output level. When making channel output adjustments  
without the internal test tone we strongly recommend  
that you use a test disc in the “repeat” mode on your  
DVD or CD player so that the signal being used is  
constant throughout the adjustment process.  
After checking for speaker placement, let the test  
noise circulate again, and listen to see which channels  
sound louder than the others. Using the front left  
‹ ›  
To make changes to the channel output settings, go  
to the CHANNELADJUSTsubmenu within  
the EZSET/EQMANUALSETUPmenu  
(Figure 17). To do this, first press the OSD Button  
The output levels may also be adjusted at any time  
using the remote control and semi-OSD system. To  
adjust the output levels in this fashion, press the Test  
Button f. As soon as the button is pressed, the  
test tone will begin to circulate as indicated earlier.  
The correct channel from which the test noise should  
be heard will be shown in the lower third of the video  
screen and in the Lower Display Line $. While the  
test noise is circulating, the proper channel position  
will also be indicated in the Speaker/Channel  
Input Indicators @ by a blinking letter within  
the correct channel.  
speaker as a reference, press the  
/
Navigation  
Button n  
©
on the remote to bring all speakers  
‹ ›  
/
to the same volume level. When the  
Button n  
Navigation  
U
so that the MASTERMENU(Figure 1)  
¤
©
is pushed, the test noise circulation  
appears. Next, press the  
until the cursor is on the EZSET/EQ  
line, and press the Set Button p . Navigate to  
EZSET/EQMANUALSETUPand press  
the Set Button p . In the EZSET/EQ  
MANUALSETUPmenu, press the  
Navigation Button n again until the cursor is  
on the CHANNELADJUSTline; then press  
the Set Button p to view the CHANNEL  
/
Navigation Button  
will pause on the channel being adjusted to give you  
time to make the adjustment. When you release the  
button, the circulation will resume after five seconds.  
n©  
œ
œ
Continue to adjust the individual channels until the  
volume level sounds the same from each speaker.  
‹ ›  
/
¤
©
Adjustments should be made with the  
/
Navigation  
⁄ ¤  
/
To adjust the output level, press the  
Button n  
Navigation  
Button n©  
on the remote control only, NOT  
œ
©
until the desired level is shown in  
the main volume controls. If you are using a sound-  
pressure level (SPL) meter for precise level adjustment,  
set the volume so that the meter reads 75dB,  
C-Weighting Slow.  
ADJUSTmenu (Figure 21).  
the display or on the screen. Once the buttons are  
released, the test noise will begin to circulate again in  
five seconds. When all channels have the same output  
level, press the Test Button f again to complete  
the process.  
* CHANNEL ADJUST *  
FL :  
CEN:  
FR :  
SR :  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
SBR:  
SBL:  
SL :  
SUB:  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
When all channels have an equal volume level, the  
adjustment is complete. To exit this menu, press the  
TEST TONE  
: AUTO OFF MAN  
NOTE: Output level adjustment with the test tone is  
not available in the Surround Off modes.  
⁄ ¤  
/
LEVEL RESET: OFF  
CH ADJUST: GLOBAL  
ON  
Navigation Button n  
©
until the cursor  
is next to the BACKTOMANUALSETUP  
line, and then press the Set Button p to  
EZSET SETTINGS: OFF ON  
BACK TO MANUAL SETUP  
œ
In addition to the controls for selecting channels and  
the test tone operation, the settings on this menu  
also allow you to reset the level settings to either the  
factory default of 0dB or to reestablish the settings  
that were entered by running EzSet/EQ.  
return to the EZSET/EQMANUAL  
SETUPmenu.  
Figure 21  
In addition to having the test tone circulate automati-  
cally, you may also turn the test tone on, but advance  
it from one channel to the next manually. This allows  
you to make calibration adjustments, but to have more  
control over the way the test tone is moved among  
the channels.  
To provide the maximum flexibility, channel output level  
adjustments may be made either with or without the  
internal test tone, and when the tone is in use it may  
be programmed to automatically circulate among the  
active channels or to only move from one channel to  
the next on your command. When the CHANNEL  
ADJUSTmenu first appears we recommend that  
you always run the test tone once the automatic mode  
to verify that the speakers have been properly con-  
⁄ ¤  
/
To reset all channel levels to 0dB, press the  
Navigation Button n  
pointing to the LEVELRESETline and then  
©
so that the cursor is  
⁄ ¤  
/
press the  
Navigation Button n  
©
once  
so that ONappears in highlighted video.  
To circulate the tone manually, first make certain that  
the CHANNELADJUSTmenu is on the  
screen, following the instructions shown above, and  
To return to the settings established by EzSet/EQ,  
even if you have made manual changes to the output  
trims using the steps shown above, press the  
Navigation Button n  
pointing to the EZSETSETTINGSline and  
⁄ ¤  
/
⁄ ¤  
/
then press the  
Navigation Button n©  
/
¤
nected. To do this, press the  
Navigation Button  
©
so that the cursor is  
until the cursor is on the TESTTONEline. Next,  
n©  
again until the cursor is on the TEST  
‹ ›  
/
press the  
Navigation Button n  
©
until  
‹ ›  
TONEline and then press the  
Button n  
/
Navigation  
‹ ›  
/
then press the  
Navigation Button n©  
MANUALappears. This will start the test tone from  
the front left speaker position but, rather than circulat-  
ing to the next channel every five seconds as is the  
©
until AUTOis in highlighted video.  
once so ONappears in highlighted video. Remember  
that after turning the EzSet/EQ settings back on you  
must return to this menu line and change the  
setting to OFFif you wish to make any manual  
trim adjustments.  
This will cause the test tone to circulate among all of  
the channels for five seconds at each position.  
case in the automatic mode, you must press the  
As the test tone circulates, the cursor will flash and  
move next to each position to indicate where the tone  
should be coming from. If the tone is coming from a  
different speaker than the one indicated on the menu  
screen turn the AVR 445 off using the Main Power  
Switch A and check the speaker wiring or connec-  
tions to external power amplifiers to make certain that  
each speaker is connected to the correct output ter-  
minal. When you have verified that all speakers are  
connected to the correct output terminal, turn the  
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Button n  
©
to change the  
channel the test tone is being sent to. When you have  
circulated through all channels the test tone will stop,  
but you may restart it by returning to the TEST  
TONEline again and activating manual sequencing.  
The last setting in this menu enables you to have the  
output levels remain the same for all inputs or to be  
adjusted differently for each (or any) input. While most  
listeners prefer to keep the same output levels for all  
sources, you may wish to raise or lower some channels,  
particularly the subwoofer output for a specific source  
such as a CD that is primarily used for music playback.  
The final option for output level adjustment using the  
menu system does not use the internal test tone at all.  
⁄ ¤  
/
To do this, simply use the  
Navigation Button  
n©  
to change the channel and then use the  
32 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
To enter individual settings for a specific channel, first  
make sure that you have either run EzSet/EQ and/or  
made any desired manual trim adjustments to set a  
baseline for all channels. After that is done, press the  
gram material. These advanced settings are described  
on pages 42 and 43 of this manual. In addition, any  
of the settings made in the initial configuration of the  
unit may be changed at any time. As you add new or  
different sources or speakers, or if you wish to change  
a setting to better reflect your listening taste, simply  
follow the instructions for changing the settings for that  
parameter as shown in this section.  
OSD Button U  
to exit the menu system and  
then select the input for which you wish to enter differ-  
ent level settings by using either the Input Source  
Selector 7 on the front panel or the buttons on  
the remote that are used to select an input source  
deXhç∂  
to the CHANNELADJUSTsubmenu using  
the steps outlined above.  
ƒ®. Next, return  
Having completed the setup and configuration process  
for your AVR 445, you are about to experience the  
finest in music and home theater listening. Enjoy!  
At the CHANNELADJUSTmenu, press the  
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Button n  
©
until the cursor  
is pointing to the CHADJUSTline and then  
‹ ›  
/
press the  
Navigation Button n  
©
once so  
that INDEPENDENTappears in highlighted  
video. When this setting is active you may change the  
channel output levels for any input without changing  
the settings previously established for another.  
NOTE: With the default GLOBALsetting, output  
levels are associated with the various surround modes.  
As you spend time listening to various materials and  
selecting a variety of surround modes, you may wish  
to revisit the CHANNELADJUSTmenu to set  
the output levels.  
When all changes to the Channel Output levels and  
the associated level trim settings have been made,  
⁄ ¤  
/
press the  
Navigation Button n  
©
until  
the cursor is on the BACKTOMANUAL  
SETUPmenu and then pressing the Set Button  
so that you may make any other adjust-  
pœ  
ments to the system parameters. If the changes just  
made complete the manual adjustments needed,  
press the OSD Button U  
to exit the menu  
system and resume normal system operation.  
Additional Input Adjustments  
After one input has been adjusted for Surround mode,  
digital input (if any), speaker type, and output levels,  
go back to the IN/OUTSETUPline on the  
MASTERMENU(Figure 1) and enter the set-  
tings for each input that you will use. In most cases,  
only the digital input and surround mode will be differ-  
ent from one input to the next, while the speaker type,  
crossover frequency, Night mode and output level  
settings will usually be the same and may be quickly  
entered by entering the same data used for the  
original input.  
Once the settings outlined on the previous pages have  
been made, the AVR 445 is ready for operation. While  
there are some additional settings to be made, these  
are best done after you have had an opportunity to lis-  
ten to a variety of sources and different kinds of pro-  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
When the remote is used to turn the unit “off,” it is  
actually placing the system in a Standby mode, as indi-  
cated by the amber lighting around the Standby/On  
Switch 1.  
XM channel that was last tuned. Press the button  
again to select between FM, AM and XM.  
Basic Operation  
Once you have completed the initial setup and configu-  
ration, the AVR 445 is simple to operate and enjoy. The  
following instructions will help you maximize the enjoy-  
ment of your new receiver:  
• To directly select the FM tuner as the input, press  
the Tuner/FM Select Button X down towards  
the bottom of the remote.  
• To put the AVR in the Sleep mode, press the  
Sleep Button S. Each press of the button will  
decrease the time before the AVR shuts down in  
the following sequence.  
• To select a specific source using the ZR 10 remote,  
press any of the Input Selectors ∂Ƀ  
Turning the AVR 445 On or Off  
• When using the AVR for the first time, you must press  
the Main Power Switch  
places the unit in a Standby mode, as indicated by the  
®. When selecting the Tuner as the input, each  
A
in until it latches. This  
press of the Tuner Selector scrolls through  
É
the choice of FM, AM or XM Radio (when an  
optional XM Ready module is installed and the XM  
service has been activated).  
amber illumination surrounding the Standby/On  
1
.
Switch  
Once you have set the desired Sleep Time, the front-  
panel display will automatically dim to half-brightness.  
The display will return to full-brightness when any but-  
ton on the front panel or a remote is pressed, and  
then return again to half-brightness. To view the time  
remaining until the unit shuts down, press the Sleep  
Button Sonce. To cancel the Sleep function,  
press the Sleep Button S as many times as needed  
until the words SLEEPOFFappear in the  
Lower Display Line D.  
• To turn the AVR on or off from the front panel, press  
REMINDER: When using any of the Input Selectors  
to change a source, you must press the AVR Selector  
1
.
the Standby/On Switch  
• To turn the unit on and select the input source that  
was in use the last time the AVR was on, press the  
4
ç
to control AVR functions other than volume  
or source selection.  
AVR Selector 4  
ç
on either remote.  
• When a new input is selected, the AVR will automat-  
ically switch to the digital input (if selected), surround  
mode, component video input, A/V sync delay and  
Night mode configurations that were in effect the  
last time that input was used.  
• To turn the unit on and select a specific source,  
press any one of the Input Selectors 3Xh  
on the main remote or ∂Ƀ® on the  
ZR 10 remote .  
When you will be away from home for an extended  
period of time, it is always a good idea to completely  
turn the unit off with the front-panel Main Power  
I When using the Input Selector Buttons 3  
labeled DVD, DMP, XM or HDMI on the main  
remote, remember that these are dual-input  
selectors. The first press of any button will turn  
the unit on and select the input name printed on  
the button. A second press of the button will  
select the input name printed above the button.  
N
• The front-panel Video 4 Inputs , Optical 4  
K
L
Digital Input  
or Coaxial 4 Digital Input  
may be used to connect a device such as a video  
game or camera to your home entertainment system  
on a temporary basis.  
A
.
Switch  
NOTE: All preset memories are lost if the unit is left  
A
• As the input source is changed, the new input name  
will appear momentarily as an on-screen display in  
the lower third of the video display (except when  
HDMI, 720p or 1080i sources are in use). The input  
name will also appear in the Upper Display Line  
# and in the front-panel Input Indicators !.  
turned off by using the Main Power Switch  
for  
more than four weeks.  
I To turn the AVR on and select the Tuner as an  
input, press the Tuner/FM Select Button X  
by pressing the button up towards the top of the  
remote. The first press of the button selects the  
frequency band and station or XM channel that  
was last tuned. Press the button again to select  
between FM, AM and XM.  
Source Selection  
• To select an input source from the front panel, press  
the Input Source Selector Button 6. Each press  
of the button will move the input selection through  
the list of available choices. If the button is pressed  
when the AVR is in the Standby mode, the first  
press of the button will turn the unit on and select  
the last used input.  
• When an audio only source is selected, the last video  
input used remains routed to the Video 1/Video  
Monitor Outputs PS. This permits simultaneous  
viewing and listening to different sources.  
I To turn the AVR on and select the FM tuner as the  
input, press the Tuner/FM Select Button X  
down towards the bottom of the remote.  
6-Channel/8-Channel Direct Input  
• When the AVR is already turned on, you may select  
the tuner directly by pressing the Tuner Band  
Selector 4. The first press will select the last  
tuned frequency band and station. Each subsequent  
press will change the band to the last tuned station  
or XM preset.  
There are four input choices available for use with  
sources such as DVD-Audio SACD player or HD-DVD  
or Blu-ray disc player that are connected to the  
8-Channel Direct Inputs c. Select the appropriate  
input according to the way your system and source  
equipment is configured:  
I When using any of the Input Selectors to turn the  
unit on (or when using them to change a source  
at any time) press the AVR Selector 4  
ç
after the unit turns on to use any of the buttons  
on the remote to control AVR functions other than  
volume or source selection.  
• To select a specific source using the main remote,  
press any one of the Input Selectors 3Xh  
on the main remote. Remember that the Input  
Selector Buttons labeled DVD, DMP, XM or HDMI  
are dual-input selectors. The first press of any button  
will turn the unit on and select the input name printed  
on the button. A second press of the button will  
select the input name printed above the button.  
• The 6CHDIRECTinput should be used  
when the SBR and SBL inputs are NOT in use and  
the input source device has its own internal bass  
management system. This input passes the input  
from the source directly through to the volume control  
without any analog-to-digital conversion, and it  
mutes the unused input jacks to prevent unwanted  
noise from interfering with system performance.  
Whenever the AVR is turned on, you will see all of the  
front-panel indicators light up for a few seconds. This is  
normal, and it is part of the unit’s power-on self-test  
procedure.  
To turn the unit off at the end of a listening session,  
simply press the Standby/On Switch 1 on the front  
panel or the Power Off Button 0  
å
on the  
remote. Power will be shut off to any equipment  
plugged into the rear-panel Switched AC Accessory  
Outlet G and the illumination around the Standby/  
On Switch 1 will turn amber.  
• To directly select the Tuner as an input, press the  
Tuner/FM Select Button X by pressing the button  
up towards the top of the remote. The first press of  
the button selects the frequency band and station or  
• The 6CHDVDAUDIOinput should be used  
when the SBR and SBL inputs are NOT in use and  
when the input source does NOT have its own  
34 OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
internal bass-management system. When this input  
is in use, the analog source is converted to digital  
so that you may use the same bass-management  
options for the direct input as are used for all other  
inputs. This input also mutes the unused input jacks  
to prevent unwanted noise from interfering with  
system performance.  
Surround modes may be changed at any time by  
using either the front panel or remote control. To  
select a new surround mode from the front panel, first  
press the Surround Mode Group Selector Button  
2 until the desired major surround mode group such  
as Dolby, DTS or Logic 7 is selected. Next, press the  
Surround Mode Selector Button 3 to choose the  
specific individual surround mode.  
the Lower Display Line $. Next, use the  
/Navigation Buttons D on the remote  
or the /Navigation Buttons on the front panel  
H to change the setting as desired. The unit will  
return to normal operation within five seconds after  
the setting is changed.  
©
• For private listening, simply place a standard  
1/4" stereo headphone plug or adapter into the  
Headphone Jack B behind the door 9 on the  
front panel. The speakers will automatically mute  
and a two-channel stereo signal will be sent to the  
headphones. The Lower Display Line $ will read  
DOLBYH:BP, indicating that the headphone  
output is in the Bypass mode, and to confirm that  
no processing is being used. To listen through the  
headphones using the Dolby Headphone mode,  
simply press the buttons on the remote or front  
panel as shown below for changing a Dolby mode.  
DOLBYH:DHwill appear in the Lower  
Display Line when the Dolby Headphone mode  
is in use.  
• The 8CHDIRECTinput should be used  
when an input is connected to all eight 8-Channel  
Direct Inputs c and when the input source device  
has its own internal bass-management system. This  
input passes the input from the source directly  
through to the volume control without any analog-  
to-digital conversion.  
To choose a surround mode using the remote, first  
press the button for the major surround mode group  
that includes the desired mode. These buttons are the  
Dolby Mode Select g, the DTS Digital Model  
Select f, the DTS Neo:6 Mode Select e, the  
DSP Surround Mode Select 6 and the Stereo  
Mode Select d buttons. The first press of a button  
will show the current mode from that group if it is  
already in use, or the first available mode if you are  
currently using another mode. To cycle through the  
available modes in that group, press the button again  
until the desired mode appears in the Lower Display  
Line $, the on-screen display (when a 480i source  
is in use) and the front-panel Surround Mode  
Indicators %.  
• The 8CHDVDAUDIOinput should be used  
when an input is connected to all eight 8-Channel  
Direct Inputs c and when the input source does  
not have its own internal bass-management system.  
When this input is in use, the analog source is con-  
verted to digital so that you may use the same  
bass-management options for the direct input as  
are used for all other inputs.  
Surround Mode Selection  
One of the most important features of the AVR 445  
is its ability to reproduce a full multichannel surround  
sound field from digital sources, analog matrix  
surround-encoded programs and standard stereo  
programs.  
Volume and Tone Control  
• Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using the  
front-panel Volume Control ) or remote Volume  
The Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, DTS 5.1, DTS-ES  
Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete modes may only be  
selected when a digital input is in use. In addition,  
when a digital source is present, the AVR 445 will  
automatically select and switch to the correct mode,  
regardless of the mode that has been previously  
selected. For more information on selecting digital  
sources, see the Digital Audio Playback section below.  
Up/Down Buttons H  
• To temporarily silence all speaker outputs, press the  
Mute Button i . This will interrupt the out-  
˙.  
Selection of a surround mode is based on personal  
taste, as well as the type of program source material  
being used. For example, motion pictures or TV pro-  
grams bearing the logo of one of the major surround-  
encoding processes, such as Dolby Surround or DTS  
Stereo may be played in either the Dolby Digital,  
Dolby Pro Logic II Cinema, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, or  
Logic 7 Cinema surround modes, depending on the  
source material.  
ß
put to all speakers and the headphone jack, but it  
will not affect any recording or dubbing that may be  
in progress. When the system is muted, the word  
MUTEwill flash in the on-screen display (except  
when HDMI, 720p or 1080i sources are in use)  
and in the Upper Display Line #; press the  
When the 6-channel/8-channel direct inputs are in  
use, there is no surround processing, as these inputs  
take the analog output signals from an external source  
device and carry them straight through to the volume  
control without any further digital processing.  
Mute Buttons i  
ß
again to return to  
normal operation.  
To listen to a program in traditional two-channel  
stereo, using the front left and front right speakers  
only (plus the subwoofer, if installed and configured),  
press the Stereo Mode Select Button d until  
SURROUNDOFFappears in the Lower Display  
Line $. From the front panel, press the Surround  
Mode Group Selector 2 until the Stereomodes  
appear in the on-screen display and Lower Display  
Line $. Next, press the Surround Mode Selector  
Button 3 until SURROUNDOFFappears in  
the on-screen display and Lower Display Line $.  
NOTE: Once a program has been encoded with matrix  
surround information, it retains the surround information  
as long as the program is broadcast in stereo. Thus,  
movies with surround sound may be decoded via any  
of the analog surround modes (e.g., Dolby Pro Logic II  
Cinema, Logic 7 Cinema or DTS Neo:6 Cinema) when  
they are broadcast via conventional TV stations, cable,  
pay-TV and satellite transmission. In addition, a growing  
number of made-for-TV programs, sports broadcasts,  
radio dramas and music CDs are also produced in sur-  
round sound. You may view a list of these programs at  
• The unit’s tone controls may be taken out of the  
signal path by pressing the Tone Mode Button  
CV. The first button press will show a message  
in the on-screen display (except when HDMI, 720p  
or 1080i sources are in use) and Lower Display  
Line $ with the current status of the tone  
controls. The system default is TONEIN, which  
indicates that the bass and treble controls are active.  
Press the /¤ Navigation Buttons D  
the remote control or the /Buttons H on the  
front panel to change the setting to TONE  
OUT, which is “flat” response without the tone  
controls being active.  
©
on  
Digital Audio Playback  
Even when a program is not listed as carrying inten-  
tional surround information, you may find that the Dolby  
Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Logic 7 or DTS Neo:6,  
and the Hall or Theater modes often deliver enveloping  
surround presentations through the use of the natural  
information present in all stereo recordings.  
Digital audio is a major advancement over older analog  
surround processing systems. It delivers up to six dis-  
crete channels, and each channel reproduces a full-fre-  
quency range (20Hz to 20kHz) and offers dramatically  
improved dynamic range and significant improvements  
to signal-to-noise ratios. In addition, digital systems have  
the capability to deliver an additional channel that is  
• When the tone controls are active, the amount of  
bass and treble boost/cut may be adjusted up  
to 10dB in 2dB steps by pressing the Tone  
Mode Button CV two or three times until the  
desired setting (BASSMODEor TREBLE  
MODE) appears in the on-screen display and in  
OPERATION 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
specifically devoted to low-frequency information. This is  
the “.1” channel referred to when you see these systems  
described as “5.1,” “6.1” or “7.1.” The bass channel is  
separate from the other channels, but since it is inten-  
tionally bandwidth-limited, sound designers have given  
it that unique designation. When a digital soundtrack  
is playing, the number of channels available will  
vary according to the way in which the program was  
recorded. Although most movies recorded with digital  
sound have 5.1 soundtracks, some have 6.1 or 7.1  
sound, while others retain the original two-channel or  
even monaural sound. When the program source is a  
broadcast, cable or satellite delivered digital program,  
only one type of soundtrack may be delivered at a  
time, while optical sources such as DVD may provide  
more than one audio option. In either case, the deci-  
sion of what type of sound track and how many chan-  
nels to offer is up to the program’s producer. With the  
AVR 445 you are able to not only play back the origi-  
nal compatible digital format, but using the processing  
power of the Texas Instruments DSP processor, it is  
possible to decode the basic digital track for 2.0 or  
5.1 sound and then select an additional “post-pro-  
cessing” mode to deliver additional channels.  
• When a disc with the Dolby Digital EX flag is played,  
your system will automatically switch to the EX mode  
when seven main speakers are available.  
• When selecting surround modes, any mode where  
the setting in its mode group (Dolby, DTS, Logic 7,  
PCM, etc.) has been set to OFFin one of the  
SURROUNDCONFIGmenus will not  
appear and may not be selected. You may change  
the settings in this list at any time by following the  
instructions on pages 24–25.  
• When a disc with 2.0 Dolby Digital data is detected,  
the default mode is Dolby Digital with Pro Logic II  
postprocessing when you have a 5.1 speaker sys-  
tem, or Dolby Digital with Dolby Pro Logic IIx post-  
processing when you have a 7.1 speaker system.  
Selecting a Digital Source  
• Depending on the number of speaker channels  
available in your system, once the AVR locks on  
to the digital signal, you may select any surround  
mode or postprocessing option that is available,  
based on the incoming data stream’s possible  
restrictions and the number of speakers in your  
system. For example, when a 5.1 or 2.0 audio  
stream is in use, you may select alternate post-  
processing such as Logic 7/7.1-channel Movie  
mode postprocessing to create the rear surrounds  
in 7.1 speaker systems.  
To utilize either digital mode, you must have properly  
connected a digital source to the AVR 445. Connect  
the digital outputs from DVD players, HDTV receivers,  
satellite systems or CD players to the Optical or Coaxial  
Inputs KLab. In order to provide a backup signal  
and a source for analog stereo recording, the analog  
outputs provided on digital source equipment should  
also be connected to their appropriate inputs on the  
AVR 445 rear panel (e.g., connect the analog stereo  
audio output from a DVD to the DVD Audio Inputs Z  
on the rear panel when you connect the source’s  
digital outputs).  
DTS  
If you have not already configured an input for a  
digital source using the on-screen menus, as shown  
on page 22, first select the input using the remote or  
front-panel controls, as outlined in this manual. Next,  
DTS is another digital audio system that is capable  
of delivering 5.1 or 6.1 discrete or matrix sound field  
reproduction. Although both DTS and Dolby Digital are  
digital, they use different methods of encoding the sig-  
nals, and thus they require different decoding circuits  
to convert the digital signals back to analog.  
Dolby Digital  
press the Digital Select ButtonE, then press the  
Dolby Digital is the default format for DVD discs and  
for the (ATSC) high-definition system used in the  
United States and Canada. It is also used by the digital  
satellite program services and is available on most  
digital cable set-top boxes. When the AVR 445 is  
connected to a blue-laser-based high-definition optical  
disc player via a coaxial or optical digital audio con-  
nection, the soundtrack may be available in the stan-  
dard Dolby Digital or DTS format so that it may be  
decoded by the AVR.  
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
on the remote  
or the ‹ ›  
/
Button H on the front panel to choose  
DTS-encoded soundtracks are available on select DVD  
and LD discs, as well as on special audio-only DTS  
discs. You may use any LD or CD player equipped  
with a digital output to play DTS-encoded discs with  
the AVR 445. All that is required is to connect the  
player’s output to either an Optical or Coaxial Input  
on the rear panel ab or front panel KL.  
any of the OPTICALor COAXIALinputs, as  
they appear in the Upper Display Line # or on-  
screen display. When the digital source is playing, the  
AVR 445 will automatically detect which type of digital  
data stream is being decoded and display that infor-  
mation in the Upper Display Line #.  
When both a digital and an analog connection are  
made between a source device and the AVR, the digi-  
tal input is the default. If the digital stream is not pres-  
ent or is interrupted, the unit will automatically switch  
over to the analog inputs for the selected source.  
In order to listen to DVDs encoded with DTS sound-  
tracks, the DVD player must be compatible with the  
DTS signal, which is indicated by a DTS logo on the  
player’s front panel. Early DVD players may not be  
able to play DTS-encoded DVDs. If you are in doubt  
as to the capability of your DVD player to handle DTS  
discs, consult the player’s owner’s manual.  
An optional, external RF demodulator is required to  
use the AVR 445 to listen to the Dolby Digital sound-  
tracks available on laser discs. Connect the RF output  
of the LD player to the demodulator and then connect  
the digital output of the demodulator to the Optical  
or Coaxial Inputs KLab of the AVR 445. A  
demodulator is not required for use with high-definition  
optical disc or DVD players, or with DTS-encoded  
laser discs.  
If you wish to disable the auto-polling feature, you  
may do so by following the instructions shown for the  
IN/OUTSETUPmenu (Figure 2), as shown  
When the AVR 445 is connected to a blue-laser-  
based high-definition optical disc player via an HDMI,  
coaxial or optical digital connection, the soundtrack  
from the player is also available in the standard DTS  
format so that it may be decoded by the AVR.  
on page 22  
.
Digital Bitstream and Surround Mode Indications  
When a digital source is playing, the AVR 445 senses  
the type of bitstream data that is present, and auto-  
matically selects the proper surround mode. For exam-  
ple, DTS bitstreams will cause the unit to switch to  
DTS decoding, and Dolby Digital bitstreams will enable  
Dolby Digital decoding. When the unit senses PCM  
data from CDs or LDs, you may select any of the stan-  
dard Dolby or DTS surround modes or Logic 7. Since  
the range of available surround modes is dependent  
on the type of digital data that is present, the AVR 445  
shows you what type of signal is present to help you  
understand the choice of modes.  
In order to provide maximum playback compatibility  
with DVDs, the AVR 445 receiver will always default  
first to the playback mode embedded in a disc’s digital  
“flag” information. For Dolby Digital discs, the following  
playback modes are initially selected after the AVR  
locks on to the incoming digital audio data stream:  
NOTE:  
• Some DVD players have a default setting that does  
not pass through the DTS signal. Before playing  
DVDs with a DTS soundtrack, make certain that  
the settings in your DVD player have been properly  
adjusted so that DTS audio is passed through.  
Consult the owner’s manual for your DVD player for  
more information on making these settings.  
• When a Dolby Digital 5.1 data stream is detected,  
the choice of which surround mode is activated is  
determined by the setting on the DEFAULT  
SURRline of the SURROUNDSETUP  
menu (Figure 5), as shown on page 24.  
36 OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
When a digital source is first detected, the AVR 445  
will display a message to indicate the type of bitstream  
being received. It will remain in the Lower Display  
Line $ for about 5 seconds before that portion of the  
display returns to the normal surround mode indication.  
appropriate 6.1 or 7.1 mode. This will be shown as  
EX-ON or EX-OFF for Dolby Digital bitstreams and  
ES-ON or ES-OFF for DTS bitstreams.  
PCM Playback  
PCM is the abbreviation for Pulse Code Modulation,  
the digital signal format used for standard CD play-  
back, and other non-Dolby Digital and non-DTS digital  
sources such as MiniDisc. When a PCMsignal is  
detected, the Lower Display Line $ will briefly  
show a message with the letters PCM, in addition to a  
readout of the sampling frequency of the digital signal.  
When a 2.0 or 5.1 digital source is playing on a sys-  
tem configured for 5.1 operation, you may use Dolby  
Digital EX, DTS-ES, Logic 7/7.1 or Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
to add rear channels for full 7.1 sound fields. Note,  
however, that the availability of specific modes for  
postprocessing is dependent on the format of the  
incoming source material. While some combina-  
tions (e.g., a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 source with  
Logic 7/7.1 or Dolby Pro Logic IIx postprocessing) are  
allowable, others (e.g., a Dolby Digital 5.1 source with  
DTS Neo:6) are not. If you wish to add surround  
back channels to a 2.0 or 5.1 source, we recom-  
mend that you experiment with the various options to  
see which may be available and which are best suited  
to your taste and listening environment.  
For Dolby Digital and DTS sources, a numerical indica-  
tion (such as 3/2/.1) will appear, showing the  
number of channels present in the data.  
In most cases, this will be PCM44.1kHzor  
PCM48kHz, though in the case of specially  
mastered, high-resolution audio discs, you will see a  
PCM96kHzindication. Note that the sampling  
rate displayed is that of the incoming digital signal, and  
not the upsampled rate that may be applied to PCM  
sources when Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby Pro Logic II  
processing is applied, as shown on page 24.  
The first number in the display message indicates how  
many discrete front-channel signals are present.  
• A “3” tells you that separate front left, center and  
front right signals are available. This will be displayed  
for Dolby Digital 5.1, Dolby Digital EX and DTS 5.1  
or DTS-EX programs.  
• A “2” tells you that separate front left and right sig-  
nals are available, but there is no discrete center  
channel signal. This will be displayed for Dolby  
Digital bitstreams that have stereo program material.  
During PCM playback, you may select any surround  
mode except Dolby Digital or DTS/DTS-ES mode.  
It is always a good idea to check the readout for the  
channel data to make certain that it matches the audio  
logo information shown on the back of a DVD pack-  
age. In some cases, you will see an indication for  
“2/0/0” even when the disc contains a full 5.1, or  
3/2/.1, signal. When this happens, check the audio  
output settings for your DVD player or the audio menu  
selections for the specific disc being played to make  
certain that the player is sending the correct signal  
to the AVR.  
USB Playback  
• A “1” tells you that there is only a mono channel  
available in the Dolby Digital bitstream.  
The AVR 445 is among the very few A/V receivers  
capable of direct connection to a computer for audio  
playback. Once the AVR is connected, audio streams  
and playback are possible through your AVR, with all  
the power and performance of the high-current amplifi-  
er, your own speakers, and the enhanced multichannel  
playback made possible through the use of Logic 7,  
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx or DTS Neo:6 processing.  
The middle number in the display message indicates  
how many discrete surround channel signals are present.  
• A “3” tells you that separate, discrete left surround,  
center surround and right surround signals are pres-  
ent. This is available only on discs with DTS-ES  
digital audio.  
The AVR 445’s USB connectivity may be used with  
NOTE: When an HDMI-equipped video display is in  
use, regardless of the type of source and whether or  
not it is connected through the AVR 445, it communi-  
cates with the source device using a technology called  
“EDID” so that the capabilities of the source and dis-  
play are properly matched. In some cases, this may  
cause configuration problems when the video display  
is not capable of handling multichannel audio. In those  
cases, it will send a signal back to the source (such as  
a DVD player or set-top box), limiting the digital audio  
output to two channels, even though a separate digital  
audio connection is made to the AVR.  
®
• A “2” tells you that separate surround left and right  
signals are available. This will be displayed for Dolby  
Digital 5.1 and DTS 5.1 programs.  
PC-compatible computers running either Microsoft  
®
Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 or higher  
installed, or Windows XP or Windows XP Media  
Center Edition with Service Pack 1 or higher installed.  
Connect one of the available USB ports on your com-  
puter or a USB hub to the USB Port W on the AVR  
using a cable with a standard USB plug on one side  
and a USB “Mini B” plug on the other side. You may  
use an optional cable available at most electronics and  
computer stores for this purpose.  
• A “1” tells you that there is only a single, surround-  
encoded surround channel. This will appear for  
Dolby Digital bitstreams that have matrix encoding.  
• A “0” indicates that there is no surround channel  
information. This will be displayed for two-channel  
stereo programs.  
The last number indicates whether there is a discrete  
low-frequency effects (LFE) channel. This is the “.1” in  
the common abbreviation of “5.1” sound and it is a  
special channel that contains only bass frequencies.  
In addition, you will need to have a media player  
installed on the computer. The AVR 445 has been  
tested for operation with Windows Media Player  
If you encounter a situation in which an HDMI source  
and display are in use and a multichannel soundtrack  
does not trigger a “3/2/.1” message when playback  
begins, it may be necessary to change a setting in the  
source. In many cases, the setting is called “Audio  
Output,” though it may vary from brand to brand.  
Change the setting to “bitstream” or “original” so that  
the digital audio output is returned to the multichannel  
data stream. For information about the specific setting  
on your source player, consult the manufacturer. This  
is not a problem with the AVR 445, but rather it is a  
by-product of HDMI and its associated content  
protection systems.  
®
Version 8.0 and above, but it is also compatible with  
®
®
many other popular players such as iTunes , Winamp  
• A “.1” tells you that an LFE channel is present.  
This will be displayed for Dolby Digital and DTS  
programs, as available.  
®
and RealPlayer. In most cases, it is best to always  
make certain that you have the latest version of the  
player installed to ensure the best compatibility.  
• A “0” indicates that there is no LFE channel infor-  
mation available. However, even when there is no  
dedicated LFE channel, low-frequency sound will be  
present at the subwoofer output when the speaker  
configuration is set to show the presence of a  
subwoofer.  
When the connection between a computer and the  
AVR is made for the first time, or if the USB connection  
is plugged into a different USB port on a computer or  
hub that has not been previously connected to the  
AVR, you will see a series of pop-up messages from  
Windows to indicate that the computer is configuring  
itself for the new device. Since the AVR provides a  
number of different functions, you may see the “Found  
New Hardware” message up to four times, one each  
• The information on the right side of the display will  
tell you whether the digital audio data contains a  
special flag signal that will automatically activate the  
OPERATION 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
for “A/V Receiver,” “Compatible Device,” “Audio  
Receiver” and “Human Interface Device.” When all  
messages have appeared and then cleared the  
screen, you are almost ready to begin.  
stream, which may be just the L and R for two-chan-  
nel PCM or 2.0 Dolby Digital material. When a 5.1  
signal is being received, the L/C/R/SL/SR indicators  
will light, with the LFE indication also being shown  
when an LFE signal is present. All seven indicators,  
including the SBL/SBR letters, will light for a 7.1 sig-  
nal, and a horizontal line is shown to connect the  
SBL/SBR indicators when a 6.1 source is in use.  
Night Mode  
A special feature of Dolby Digital is the Night mode,  
which enables specially encoded Dolby Digital input  
sources to be played back with full digital intelligibility  
while reducing the minimum peak level by 1/4 to 1/3.  
This prevents abruptly loud transitions from disturbing  
others, without reducing the impact of the digital  
source. The Night mode is available only when Dolby  
Digital signals with special data are being played.  
Before selecting the USB input, first make certain  
that one of the media players listed above has been  
opened on the computer. Then you may select the  
USB input in any of the following ways:  
It is important to note that although Dolby Digital, for  
example, is referred to as a “5.1” system, not all Dolby  
Digital DVDs or programs are encoded for 5.1. Thus,  
it is sometimes normal for a DVD with a Dolby Digital  
soundtrack to trigger only the “Land “R” indicators.  
• To select USB as a source from the front panel,  
press the Input Source Selector Button 7 until  
USB appears as the input name in the Upper Display  
Line # and in the semi-OSD display, if available.  
The USB Input Source Indicator ! will also  
light up on the front panel.  
The Night mode may be engaged at any time when  
a Dolby Digital source is playing by pressing the Night  
Mode Button T Each press of the button will  
change the Night mode setting, as shown in the lower  
third of the on-screen display (except when HDMI,  
720p or 1080i sources are in use). To turn the  
Night mode off, press the button as described, until  
D-RANGEOFFis shown.  
.
NOTE: Many DVD discs are recorded with both “5.1”  
and “2.0” versions of the same soundtrack. When  
playing a DVD, always be certain to check the type of  
material on the disc. Most discs show this information  
in the form of a listing or icon on the back of the disc  
jacket. When a disc does offer multiple soundtrack  
choices, you may have to make some adjustments to  
your DVD player (usually with the “Audio Select” button  
or in a menu screen on the disc) to send a full 5.1  
feed to the AVR 445. It is also possible for the type of  
signal feed to change during the course of a DVD’s  
playback. In some cases, the previews of special  
material will only be recorded in 2.0 audio, while the  
main feature is available in 5.1 audio. The AVR 445  
will automatically sense changes to the bitstream and  
channel count and reflect them in these indicators.  
• To select USB as the input using the main remote  
press the Input Selector 4 with DMP printed on  
the button twice.  
The Night mode may also be selected to always be on  
at either level of compression using the options in the  
DOLBYSURROUNDmenu. See page 25 for  
information on using the menus to set this option.  
• To select USB as the input using the ZR 10 remote,  
press the USB Input Selector  
.  
When the USB input is selected and the AVR 445 is  
connected to a compatible computer with one of the  
media players mentioned above open, you may then  
use either remote’s transport controls to start and stop  
playback, as well as move to the next track. Activity of  
the Transport buttons may vary from one media player  
to another, but at the very least you will be able to use  
the Play and Stop buttons.  
IMPORTANT NOTES ON DIGITAL PLAYBACK:  
• When playing DVDs, please note that even when you  
have selected a specific digital audio format for play-  
back, an individual disc may change formats or the  
number of available channels during playback. For  
example, even if you select a DTS mode for the movie,  
you may see Dolby Digital in use when the trailers,  
menus or copyright warnings are playing. This is not a  
fault with either the AVR or your DVD player, as both  
are responding to the way the disc was created.  
Once playback is started, the audio from a USB source  
is treated the same as any other two-channel audio  
source, and you may apply any of the appropriate  
surround processing modes. When playing back audio  
from a computer via the USB connection, the internal  
speakers in a laptop computer are often muted.  
The letters used by the Speaker/Channel Input  
Indicators @ will flash to indicate when a bitstream  
has been interrupted. This will happen when a digital  
input source is selected before the playback starts, or  
when a digital source such as a DVD is paused. The  
flashing indicators remind you that the playback has  
stopped due to the absence of a digital signal and not  
through any fault of the AVR 445. This is normal, and  
the digital playback will resume once the playback is  
started again.  
• When viewing digital television signals, note that the  
number of audio channels available may vary during  
the course of a program, depending on the content.  
For example, while a sports event may have 5.1  
sound, the commercials or local station content may  
be in 2.0. In addition, not all local stations are currently  
equipped for carrying the 5.1 digital audio signals. This  
may mean that even though the actual program is  
produced with 5.1, it may be transmitted in a 2.0  
configuration in some areas. Your AVR will automatically  
change to react to the proper type of audio stream if it  
is changed by the broadcast station.  
Speaker/Channel Indicators  
In addition to the bitstream indicators, the AVR 445  
features a set of unique channel-input indicators that  
tell you how many channels of digital information are  
being received and/or whether the digital signal is  
interrupted (Figure 22).  
The boxes around the channel indication letters are  
used to show which speakers are configured in your  
system. A small box around the letter indicates that a  
“Small” speaker has been assigned to that position,  
while a larger, double box indicates a “Large” speaker  
assignment.  
LFE  
• Although the AVR 445 will decode virtually all current  
DVD movies, CDs and HDTV sources, it is possible  
that some future digital sources may not be compati-  
ble with the AVR 445.  
Note that in some cases, such as an analog stereo or  
2.0 digital sources you will see empty speaker posi-  
tion boxes, which indicates that the speaker is active  
and will receive sound, but that there is no discrete  
signal for that channel. In other cases you may see  
letters with no speaker boxes. This indicates that there  
is a discrete signal for that channel, but due to the  
mode in use (e.g., Dolby VS with a 5.1 source) there  
is no signal being sent to the channel.  
• Not all digitally encoded programs contain full 5.1-  
or 6.1-channel audio. Consult the program guide  
that accompanies the DVD or laser disc to deter-  
mine which type of audio has been recorded on the  
disc. The AVR 445 will automatically sense the type  
of digital surround encoding used and adjust to  
accommodate it.  
Figure 22  
The letters inside the boxes tell you which channels  
are receiving an input signal. Since conventional ana-  
log audio is only two channels, the “L” and “R” letters  
will light with any analog source. When a digital source  
is in use, you will see letters displayed that correspond  
to the number of channels in the incoming data  
38 OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
• When a digital source is playing, you may not be  
able to select some of the analog surround modes  
such as Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,  
Stereo, Hall, Theater or Logic 7.  
an iPod, see the instructions that are included with  
The Bridge.  
receives a strong-enough signal for adequate recep-  
tion, MANUALTUNEDwill appear in the  
Lower Display Line $.  
AM/FM Tuner Operation  
• Stations may also be tuned directly in either the  
automatic or manual mode. To enter a station’s  
frequency directly, first select the AM or FM band  
as shown above. Next, press the Direct Button  
The AVR 445’s AM/FM tuner is capable of tuning AM,  
FM and FM Stereo broadcast stations. Stations may be  
tuned manually, or they may be stored as favorite sta-  
tion presets and recalled from a 30-position memory.  
• When a Dolby Digital or DTS source is playing,  
to make an analog recording using the Tape  
Outputs 2 and Video 1 Audio Outputs g,  
you must change the RECOUTsetting on  
the second page of the IN/OUTSETUP  
menu (Fig. 3) to DSPDWNMIX. The digital  
signals will be passed through to the Digital Audio  
Outputs XY.  
8
µ. Within 5 seconds of when  
Tuner and Station Selection  
DIRECTINscrolls in the Upper Display  
Line #, enter the station frequency by pressing  
The AVR 445’s AM/FM tuner may be selected as the  
unit’s source, and stations changed, by following one  
of these steps:  
• From the front panel, press the Input Source  
Selector 6 until the desired tuner frequency band  
(AM, FM or XM) appears. To change stations within  
a frequency band, press the Tuning Selection 3.  
the Numeric Keys k  
incorrect button while entering a direct frequency,  
press the Clear Button 9 to start over.  
. If you press an  
¬
TM  
The  
Bridge  
Using  
NOTE: When FM reception of a station is weak, audio  
quality will be increased by switching to Mono mode  
by switching to the MANUAL/MONOmode.  
The AVR 445 is equipped for use with Harman Kardon’s  
TM  
The  
Bridge  
optional  
iPod docking station.  
When The Bridge is connected to the AVR and an  
iPod properly docked, you may use either remote to  
control the iPod for audio playback while using the  
front-panel display and on-screen semi-OSD mes-  
sages to help you locate tracks or view information  
about the track being played. In addition, connecting  
an iPod to the AVR 445 through The Bridge also  
charges the iPod’s battery. You may even have the  
AVR 445 automatically turn on with your iPod as a  
playback source whenever the iPod is turned on, by  
using the DMPAUTOPOWERmenu option,  
described on page 43.  
Preset Tuning  
• You may also press the front panel’s Tuner Band  
Selector 4 to select the tuner. The first press  
will select the last used frequency band and station.  
Subsequent presses will change the frequency  
bands, selecting the last used station or XM pro-  
gram used. Press the Tuning Selection 3 to  
change stations within a frequency band.  
Using the remote, up to 30 AM or FM stations may be  
stored in the AVR 445’s memory for easy recall, using  
the front-panel controls or the remote.  
To enter a station into the memory, first tune the station  
using the steps outlined above. Then:  
1. Press the Memory Button b  
frequency will flash.  
ñ; the station’s  
• From the main remote, press the Tuner/FM Select  
Button X by pressing the button up towards  
the top of the remote. The first press of the button  
selects the frequency band and station or XM  
channel that was last tuned. Press the button  
again to select between FM, AM and XM. You may  
also directly select the FM tuner by pressing the  
Tuner/FM Select Button X down toward the  
bottom of the remote. To change stations, press  
the Tuning Up/Down Button M.  
2. Within 5 seconds, press the Numeric Keys  
corresponding to the location where you  
c
wish to store this station’s frequency. Once entered,  
the preset number will appear in the Upper Display  
Line #.  
To select The Bridge as the AVR’s input source:  
• From the front panel, press the Input Source  
Selector 6 on the front panel as needed.  
3. Repeat the process after tuning any additional  
stations to be preset.  
• From the main remote, press the DMP Input  
Selector 3.  
• To select the tuner from the ZR 10 remote, press  
Recalling Preset Stations  
TM  
• From the ZR 10 remote, press the The  
/DMP S  
Bridge  
the Tuner Selector  
É, or for XM Radio press  
®
.
the XM Radio Selector Button  
ƒ
(when an  
To manually select a station previously entered  
optional XM Connect & Play module is connected  
and the programming service has been activated).  
in the preset memory, press the Numeric Keys  
When The Bridge is connected and a compatible iPod  
properly docked, the iPod’s menu will be replaced with  
“harman/kardon” at the top of the iPod’s screen and  
the front-panel display and semi-OSD message will  
show messages that will guide you through the menu  
and content selection. If the Lower Display Line D  
shows an UNPLUGGED… message, please  
check to see that the correct iPod adapter is used in  
The Bridge and that the iPod is properly seated.  
c
that correspond to the desired station’s  
memory location.  
To change the tuning mode, press the Tuning Mode  
To manually tune through the list of stored preset stations  
one by one, press the Preset Buttons 6v on  
the front panel or the main remote, or the Prev/Next  
Button 7B  
ø.  
When the button is pressed so that AUTO/  
STEREOappears in the Upper Display Line #,  
each press will put the tuner in a scan mode that  
seeks the next higher or lower frequency station with  
acceptable signal strength. An AUTOST  
TUNEDindication will momentarily appear when  
the station stops at a stereo FM station, and an  
AUTOTUNEDindication will momentarily appear  
when an AM or monaural FM station is tuned. Press  
the Tuning buttons again to scan to  
Transport Controls  
π
on the ZR 10 remote.  
XM Radio Operation  
XM Radio is a satellite-delivered service that offers  
hundreds of program channels, as well as local traffic  
and weather information for select cities. The AVR 445  
is “XM Ready,” which means that the unit is able to  
receive the XM service when an optional XM Connect  
& Play module is connected and the service activated.  
You may purchase the antenna module needed for  
XM Radio from many electronics or online retailers, or  
directly from XM Radio through the “Home Receivers”  
The AVR’s front-panel controls may also be used to  
access a limited number of iPod functions. Press the  
Tuning Mode Button 7 to play or pause the cur-  
rent track. The Tuning Selector 3 may be used to  
search in reverse (left side of button) or forward (right  
side of button) through the tracks. Press the Tuner  
Band Selector 4 to call up the iPod’s menu. Press  
the Preset Station Selectors 5 to scroll and the  
Set Button I to select. For complete information  
on using the remote or front-panel controls to operate  
the next receivable station.  
When the button is pressed so that MANUAL/  
MONOappears in the Upper Display Line #,  
each tap of the Selector will increase or decrease  
the frequency by one increment. When the tuner  
OPERATION 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
Once you have purchased the XM module, follow  
the instructions accompanying it to activate the XM  
Service. Connect the plug on the XM module to the  
XM Ready Input V on the rear panel of the AVR  
445. For best results, point the antenna module out a  
window, again, following the instructions packed with  
the XM product. If a window view is not available for  
the antenna, XM Radio operates a series of terrestrial  
repeater stations that may be able to provide recep-  
tion, though this service is not available everywhere.  
the channel name. You may change this display to  
show the current artist and track title information by  
Recording  
In normal operation, the audio or video source  
selected for listening through the AVR 445 is sent to  
the record outputs. This means that any program you  
are watching or listening to may be recorded simply  
by placing machines connected to the outputs for  
Tape Outputs £ or Video 1 Audio and Video  
Outputs Sg in the record mode. Remember that  
if your source is Dolby Digital or DTS, and you wish  
to make an analog recording, you must change  
the RECOUTsetting on the second page of  
the IN/OUTSETUPmenu (Figure 3) to  
DSPDWNMIX.  
pressing the Tuning Mode Selector 7B  
ø.  
When you are listening to a channel with local traffic  
information in the “200” series of channel numbers,  
these buttons change the display to show the tem-  
perature and current weather for the selected city.  
• To tune a channel number directly, simply press the  
Numeric Keys c  
. Unlike standard AM/FM  
tuner operation, it is not necessary to press the  
Direct button first.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: XM Radio requires both the  
optional, external antenna module and a sub-  
scription to the XM Radio service. Antenna and  
service sold separately; XM Radio is not avail-  
able in Alaska or Hawaii.  
• The AVR 445 has five banks of preset memories  
for XM Radio, each with eight memory positions  
and designated by a letter (“A” through “E”). To  
store a channel into a memory group, first press  
When a digital audio recorder is connected to the  
Digital Audio Outputs XY, you are able to record  
the digital signal using a CD-R, MiniDisc or other digi-  
tal recording system.  
If you need to view the antenna module’s number,  
connect it to the AVR and then follow one of the steps  
shown below to select XM Radio as the input source.  
Tune to “000” to get a readout of the number.  
the Set Button F  
œ
until PRESET  
SEARCHappears in the Upper Display Line  
C and on the top line of the semi-OSD display.  
NOTES:  
Next, press the  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
• The digital outputs are active only when a digital sig-  
nal is present, and they do not convert an analog  
input to a digital signal, or change the format of the  
digital signal. In addition, the digital recorder must  
be compatible with the output signal. For example,  
the PCM digital input from a CD player may be  
recorded on a CD-R or MiniDisc, but Dolby Digital  
or DTS signals may not.  
©
until the desired preset memory bank letter  
Once you have an activated module connected, follow  
one of these steps to select XM Radio as your sys-  
tem’s audio source:  
appears in the Lower Display Line D and in the  
bottom line of the semi-OSD display. Next, press the  
Memory Button b  
will start to flash next to the preset memory bank  
letter. Within five seconds, press the Numeric  
Button c  
you wish to use.  
ñ
and note that a dash  
• From the front panel, press the Input Source  
Selector 6. If XM was the last-used tuner source,  
it will appear; or press the button again until XM  
Radio is heard. Press the Tuning Selector 3 to  
change stations within a frequency band. Press the  
Tuning Selector 3 to select a different XM channel.  
from 1 to 8 for the memory slot  
• The Front-Panel Video 4 N jacks may be config-  
ured for use as outputs, allowing connection to a  
recorder, when the steps shown in the section below  
are followed.  
• To tune up or down through a list of channels stored  
in the currently active preset memory, press the  
Preset Up/Down Buttons L. You may also  
use the Preset Station Selector 5 on the front  
• From the main remote, press the Tuner/FM Select  
Button X by pressing the button up towards the  
top of the remote as needed until XM Radio is  
shown as the source. To change stations, press the  
Tuning Up/Down Button M.  
panel, or the Prev/Next Transport Controls  
on the ZR 10 remote. To change to another preset  
bank, press the Set Button FI and then  
Navigation Buttons HD  
π
• Please make certain that you are aware of any  
copyright restrictions on any material you copy.  
Unauthorized duplication of copyrighted materials  
is prohibited by federal law.  
œ
• To select the tuner from the ZR 10 remote control,  
press the  
/
©
press the XM Radio Selector Button  
Channels are selected using the Prev/Next  
Transport Controls  
ƒ.  
until the desired preset memory bank letter appears  
in the Lower Display Line D and in the bottom  
line of the semi-OSD display.  
Front-Panel Connections  
π
.
In addition to the rear-panel digital and analog outputs,  
the AVR 445 offers Harman Kardon’s exclusive config-  
urable front-panel output-jack feature. For easy con-  
nection of portable devices, you may switch the front-  
panel Video 4 Jacks N from an input to an output  
by changing the VIDEO4setting on the second  
page of the IN/OUTSETUPmenu (Figure 3)  
from INto OUT.  
While using XM Radio is similar in many ways to  
AM/FM terrestrial radio, the wide range of program  
choices available, as well as the ability of the XM serv-  
ice to add special data and information tags into the  
digital audio data stream, means that some of the  
front-panel and remote controls traditionally used  
for tuner operation have different functions with  
XM Radio.  
• Each XM Radio channel is assigned a category,  
which may be viewed by pressing the Tuning  
Mode Selector B7  
an XM channel in any of the categories by first  
pressing the Set ButtonFI and then  
Navigation Buttons HD  
until the desired category name appears in the  
ø. You may search for  
œ
pressing the  
/
©
Lower Display Line D and in the bottom line  
of the semi-OSD display. Press the Set Button  
FI  
Once the setting is made, the Input/Output Status  
Indicator M will turn red, indicating that the jacks are  
now outputs, instead of the default setting as inputs.  
Once changed to an output, the setting will remain as  
long as the AVR 445 is turned on, unless the setting  
is changed in the OSD menu system. However, once  
the AVR 445 is turned off, the setting is canceled.  
When the unit is turned on again, the front-panel jacks  
will return to their normal default setting as inputs.  
• When XM Radio is the AVR’s source, the channel  
number will appear in the Upper Display Line C,  
along with an indication of the Preset number, if any,  
and a series of bars at the far right end of the dis-  
play. These bars (not shown in the semi-OSD mes-  
sage), show the current signal strength similar to the  
signal strength displays on a cellular phone.  
œ
again to start the search for the next  
channel in that category.  
• Note that you may see a LOADINGmessage,  
indicating that the XM tuner is downloading content  
and may not be able to operate. If the message  
continues to appear, check to see whether the XM  
antenna is properly positioned toward a south-facing  
window, experiment with the antenna position, or  
change to another input and then reselect XM Radio.  
• The current channel’s name will normally appear in  
the Lower Display Line D. For local traffic infor-  
mation, the name of a city will be shown in place of  
40 OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION  
Output Level Trim Adjustment  
EzSet/EQ On/Off  
Normal output level adjustment for the AVR 445 is  
established using EzSet/EQ, as outlined on pages  
26–28. In some cases, however, it may be desirable  
to trim the output levels using program material such  
as a test disc, or a selection you are familiar with.  
Additionally, the output level for the subwoofer can  
only be adjusted using this procedure.  
If you wish to turn the filter settings established  
by EzSet/EQ on or off to demonstrate the impact  
EzSet/EQ has on the sound of your system, simply  
press the EzSet/EQ On/Off button A. Using this  
feature does not change the settings; it merely puts  
them in or out of the signal path.  
Dim Function  
To adjust the output levels using program material, first  
set the reference volume for the front left and front right  
Since the AVR 445 will often be used when movies  
or other kinds of video programming are viewed under  
low-light conditions, you may wish to lower the bright-  
ness of the front-panel displays and indicators so that  
they do not distract from the video presentation. You  
may dim the displays using the menu system, as  
shown on page 42, or you may control the brightness  
directly from the remote.  
channels using the Volume Control )H  
˙.  
Once the reference level has been set, press the  
Channel Select Button CE and FRONTL  
LEVELwill appear in the Lower Display Line $.  
To change the level, first press the Set Button  
⁄ ¤  
/
IF, and then use the  
Navigation Buttons  
HD to raise or lower the level. DO NOT use the  
volume control, as this will alter the reference setting.  
Simply press the Dim ButtonW once to dim the  
front panel to half the normal brightness level; press it  
again to turn the displays off. Note that when the  
displays are dimmed or turned off, the blue lighting  
around the Standby/On Switch 1 will continue to  
stay lit as a reminder that the AVR is still turned on.  
The accent lighting for the Volume Control ) will  
remain at its normal level, rather than dim when the  
panel displays are at half-brightness.  
Once the change has been made, press the Set  
⁄ ¤  
/
Button IF; then press the  
Navigation  
Buttons HD to select the next output-channel  
location that you wish to adjust. To adjust the sub-  
⁄ ¤  
/
woofer level, press the  
Navigation Button  
Ho until WOOFERLEVELappears in the  
Lower Display Line $ or on-screen display.  
Note that all changes to the front-panel brightness  
level are temporary; the displays will return to full-  
brightness after the AVR is turned off and then on  
again. To return the displays to full-brightness without  
turning the unit off, press Dim Button W as needed  
until the displays are on.  
Repeat the procedure as needed until all channels  
requiring adjustment have been set. When all adjust-  
ments have been made and no further adjustments  
are made for 5 seconds, the AVR 445 will return to  
normal operation.  
In addition to lowering the brightness of the displays  
or turning them off completely, you may wish to have  
them appear whenever a button on the remote or  
front panel is pushed, and then gradually fade out after  
a set time period. You may do this by making the  
appropriate settings in the VFDFADETIME  
OUTline of the ADVANCEDSELECT  
menu, as shown on page 42.  
The output levels may also be adjusted using the  
on-screen menu system to either the internal test tone  
or an external test disc by following the instructions  
shown on page 31.  
Memory Backup  
This product is equipped with a memory backup  
system that preserves the system configuration infor-  
mation and tuner presets if the unit is accidentally  
unplugged or subjected to a power outage. This  
memory will last for at least four weeks, after which  
time all information must be reentered.  
OPERATION 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVANCED FEATURES  
The AVR 445 is equipped with a number of advanced  
features that add extra flexibility to the unit’s operation.  
While it is not necessary to use these features to  
operate the unit, they provide additional options that  
you may wish to use.  
press the Set Button F  
ment to another menu. If you have completed  
all adjustments, press the OSD Button U  
to exit the menu system.  
œ
to make an adjust-  
the video screen or in the Lower Display Line $.  
(A typical volume level will appear as a negative  
number such as –25dB.) When making the adjust-  
‹ ›  
/
ment, use the  
Navigation Buttons D©  
to enter this setting.  
Display Brightness  
To change a setting from its factory default, you will  
use the ADVANCEDmenu. Press the OSD  
The AVR 445’s front-panel displays and indicators are  
set at a default brightness level that is sufficient for  
viewing in a normally lit room. However, you may wish  
to occasionally lower the brightness of the display, or  
turn it off completely.  
Unlike some of the other adjustments in this menu,  
the turn-on volume default will remain in effect until  
it is changed or turned off in this menu, even when  
the unit is turned off.  
Button U  
to call up the MAINMENU  
⁄ ¤  
/
(Figure 1). Next, press the  
Buttons D  
ADVANCED; then press the Set Button  
. When the ADVANCEDmenu (Figure  
Navigation  
©
so that the cursor is next to  
If you wish to make other adjustments, press the  
⁄ ¤  
⁄ ¤  
/
Next, press the  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
until the on-  
pœ  
until the cursor is next to the VFDline. Press the  
Navigation Buttons D until the desired bright- BACKTOMASTERMENUline, and press  
the Set Button F . If you have no other adjust-  
screen cursor is next to the desired setting or the  
23) appears, follow the instructions shown below to  
make any needed configuration adjustments.  
©
ness level is highlighted in the video display. When  
FULLis highlighted, the display is at its normal bright-  
ness. When HALFis highlighted, the display is at  
half the normal brightness level. When OFFis high-  
lighted, all of the front-panel indicators will go dark.  
However, the blue lighting surrounding the Standby/  
On Switch 1 will remain lit to remind you that the  
AVR is still turned on.  
œ
ments to make, press the OSD Button U  
to  
*
ADVANCED  
*
exit the menu system.  
VFD FADE TIME OUT: OFF  
VFD BRIGHTNESS: FULL  
VOLUME DEFAULT: OFF ON  
DEFAULT VOL SET: -25dB  
SEMI OSD TIME OUT: 5S  
FULL OSD TIME OUT: 20S  
DMP AUTO POWER: OFF ON  
Semi-OSD Settings  
The semi-OSD system places one-line messages at  
the lower third of the video display screen whenever  
the Volume, Input Source, Surround Mode, Tuner  
Frequency or any of the configuration settings is  
changed (except when HDMI, 720p or 1080i sources  
are in use). The semi-OSD system is helpful in that it  
enables you to have feedback on any control changes  
or remote commands using the video display when  
it is difficult to view the front-panel displays. However,  
you may also prefer to turn these displays off perma-  
nently. You may also want to adjust the length of time  
the displays remain on the screen. Both of those  
options are possible with the AVR 445.  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
Once the desired brightness level is selected, it will  
remain in effect until it is changed again or until the  
unit is turned off.  
Figure 23  
Front-Panel Display Fade  
In normal operation, the front-panel displays and indi-  
cators remain on at full-brightness, although you may  
also dim them or turn them off, as shown on page 41.  
As an additional option, you may also set the AVR so  
that the displays are on whenever a button is pressed  
on the front panel or remote, but then fade out after a  
set period of time.  
If you wish to make other adjustments, press the  
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
until the cursor  
is next to the desired setting or the BACKTO  
MASTERMENUline and press the Set Button  
F
œ. If you have no other adjustments to make,  
press the OSD Button U  
to exit the menu  
system.  
With the ADVANCEDmenu on the screen, press  
⁄ ¤  
the  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
so that the  
With the ADVANCEDmenu on your video dis-  
Turn-On Volume Level  
cursor is pointing to the SEMIOSD/TIME  
OUTline. Then select one of these options:  
⁄ ¤  
/
play, press the  
Navigation Buttons D©  
As is the case with most audio/video receivers, when  
the AVR 445 is turned on, it will always return to the  
volume setting in effect when the unit was turned off.  
However, you may prefer to always have the AVR 445  
turn on at a specific setting, regardless of what was  
last in use when the unit was turned off.  
so that the cursor is pointed to the VFDFADE  
‹ ›  
TIMEOUTline. Next, press the  
Buttons D  
/
Navigation  
• To keep the semi-OSD system activated, but to  
adjust the length of time the displays remain on  
the screen, press the  
©
so that the amount of time that you  
wish the displays to fade out after a button is pressed  
is shown. When OFFis selected, there is no display  
fade-out.  
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Buttons  
D
©
until the desired time-out is shown. The  
default setting is 5 seconds.  
With the ADVANCEDmenu on the screen, press  
Once this time is set and the unit returned to normal  
operation, the displays will remain on for the time  
period selected whenever a button is pressed on the  
front panel or remote. After that time, they will gradually  
fade out, with the exception of the lighting surrounding  
the Standby/On Switch 1, which remains on to  
remind you that the AVR is turned on. Note that if the  
displays have been turned completely off using the  
Dim function, the Fade function will not operate.  
⁄ ¤  
the  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
as needed  
• To turn the semi-OSD system off so that it does not  
‹ ›  
/
until the cursor is next to the DEFAULTVOL  
SETline. Press the  
appear at any time, press the  
Navigation  
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Buttons  
Buttons D  
©
so that OFFis shown on the  
D
©
until the desired volume level is shown on  
right side of the line.  
the DEFAULTVOLSETline. This setting  
may NOT be made with the regular volume controls.  
⁄ ¤  
To make other adjustments, press the  
Navigation Buttons D  
/
©
until the cursor is  
NOTE: Since the setting for the turn-on volume can-  
not be heard while the setting is being made, you  
may wish to determine the setting before making the  
adjustment. To do this, listen to any source and adjust  
the volume to the desired level using the regular  
next to the desired setting or the BACKTO  
MASTERMENUline and press the Set Button  
F
œ. If you have no other adjustments to make,  
If you wish to make adjustments to other items  
press the OSD Button U  
to exit the menu  
⁄ ¤  
on the ADVANCEDmenu, press the  
Navigation Buttons D  
/
system.  
Volume Controls )H  
˙. When the desired  
©
so that the cursor is  
volume level to be used at turn-on is reached, make  
a note of the setting as it appears in the lower third of  
next to the desired item, or place the cursor next to  
the BACKTOMASTERMENUline and  
42 ADVANCED FEATURES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVANCED FEATURES  
Full-OSD Time-Out Adjustment  
The FULLOSDmenu system is used to simplify  
the setup and adjustment of the AVR 445 by using a  
series of on-screen menus. The factory default setting  
for these menus leaves them on the screen for 20  
seconds after a period of inactivity before they disap-  
pear from the screen (Time-Out). Time-Out is a safety  
measure to prevent image retention of the menu text  
in your monitor or projector, which might happen if it  
were left on indefinitely. However, some viewers may  
prefer a slightly longer or shorter period before the  
on-screen display disappears.  
With the ADVANCEDmenu on the screen  
(Figure 23) make certain that the cursor is next to the  
FULLOSDTIMEOUTline by pressing the  
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
as needed.  
‹ ›  
Next, press the  
/
Navigation Buttons D©  
until the desired time is displayed in seconds. Unlike  
most of the other options in this menu, this is a per-  
manent setting change, and the Time-Out entry will  
remain in effect until it is changed, even if the unit is  
turned off.  
If you wish to make other adjustments, press the  
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Buttons D  
©
until the cursor  
is next to the desired setting or the BACKTO  
MASTERMENUline and press the Set Button  
œ. If you have no other adjustments to make, press  
the OSD Button U  
to exit the menu system.  
TM  
The  
DMP/ Bridge Auto Power  
When using Harman Kardon’s optional Bridge  
TM  
The  
iPod docking station, the normal operation is to have  
the iPod selected as the input source only when it is  
specifically chosen. However, you may set the AVR so  
that whenever the iPod is turned on, the AVR will also  
turn on automatically and set The Bridge as the input.  
To change the setting, first make certain that the  
ADVANCEDmenu (Figure 23) is on the screen,  
⁄ ¤  
and then press the  
/
Navigation Buttons  
D
©
until the cursor is pointing to DMP  
⁄ ¤  
AUTOPOWER. Press the  
Buttons D  
/
Navigation  
©
so that ONis highlighted to have  
the AVR turn on in sync with an iPod, or OFFfor  
standard operation.  
ADVANCED FEATURES 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MULTIROOM OPERATION  
The AVR 445 is fully equipped to operate as the con-  
trol center for a complete multiroom system that is  
capable of sending one audio source to a second  
zone in the house while a separate source is listened  
to in the main room. In addition to providing for con-  
trol over the selection of the remote source and its  
volume, the AVR 445 offers a comprehensive range of  
options for powering the speakers in the second zone.  
For installations where A-BUS modules are used, fol-  
At the MULTIINline, press the  
/
Navigation  
low the instructions provided with the A-BUS remote  
modules or keypads. Additional information will also be  
made available through the Harman Kardon Web site  
Buttons D until the desired input to the multi-  
©
room system appears in the highlighted video. In addi-  
tion to direct selection of any active input source, you  
may also select the DSPDWNMIXmode, which  
outputs a two-channel down-mixed version of multi-  
channel digital sources. When the selection has been  
¤
RS-232 Control  
The AVR 445 provides the capability for full bidirec-  
tional remote control from compatible computers or  
specialized remote control systems. RS-232 program-  
ming requires specialized programming knowledge  
and for that reason we recommend that it only be  
done by qualified professionals. For more information  
on using the RS-232 port for remote control, visit the  
or contact our customer service department.  
made, press the Navigation Button D  
©
once so that the cursor is next to MRVOL.  
• Using the line-level Multiroom Audio Outputs 8,  
the selected source may be fed to optional, external  
power amplifiers that may be matched to the  
specifics of the installation.  
At the MRVOLline, press the  
/
Navigation  
Buttons D until the desired volume level for  
the multiroom system is entered. DO NOT use the  
regular volume control knobs for this setting. When  
©
• When the main room system is configured for 5.1  
operation, the Surround Back Left/Right amplifier  
channels may be used to power the remote zone so  
that no additional amplifiers are required.  
all settings for the multiroom setup have been made,  
⁄ ¤  
/
press the  
Navigation Buttons D  
the cursor is next to the BACKTOMASTER  
MENUline. If you have no other adjustments to  
©
until  
Multiroom Setup  
• Using built-in A-BUS/READY technology, optional  
A-BUS modules may be connected to the AVR 445  
via a single Category 5/5e or higher cable, so that  
remote zone speakers may be powered directly  
from the A-BUS module without the need for addi-  
tional power, IR sensor or volume control wires to  
be run to the second zone.  
Once the audio and IR link connections have been made,  
the AVR 445 needs to be configured for multiroom  
operation. To change a setting from its factory default,  
use the MULTI-ROOMmenu. First, press  
make, press the OSD Button U  
menu system.  
to exit the  
Surround Channel Amplifier Assignment  
the OSD Button U  
to call up the MAIN  
The AVR 445 is equipped with seven full-power  
amplifier channels to allow for complete 7.1-channel  
operation. However, if your system is only configured  
for 5.1 channels in the main listening room, you may  
take advantage of the “extra” two channels by using  
them to power speakers placed in a second-zone  
location. This enables you to use the multiroom capabili-  
ties of the AVR 445 without the cost of an additional,  
external power amplifier.  
⁄ ¤  
MENU(Figure 1). Next, press the  
Buttons D  
MULTI-ROOM, then press the Set Button  
. When the MULTI-ROOMmenu  
/
Navigation  
©
so that the cursor is next to  
In addition, the AVR 445 includes a remote IR sensor  
input so that remote control commands from the  
ZR 10 remote included with the unit may be transmitted  
to the unit, while standard IR input/output jacks allow  
the remote zone’s commands to be sent to compatible  
IR-controlled source devices.  
F
œ
(Figure 24) appears, follow the instructions shown below  
to make any needed configuration adjustments.  
*
MULTI-ROOM  
*
MULTI-ROOM:OFF ON  
MULTI IN:FM PRESET 01  
MR VOL:Ð25dB  
To change the setting so that the Surround Back  
amplifiers are fed by the source selected through  
the Multiroom system rather than the SBL/SBR  
channels of the main room, make certain that the  
Installation  
SB AMPS:MAIN MULTI  
CARRIER OUT: ZONE II  
Although simple remote room systems may be  
installed by the average do-it-yourself hobbyist,  
the complexity of your multizone/multiroom system  
involves running wires inside of walls where the ser-  
vices of a specially trained installer may be required.  
Regardless of who does the work, please remember  
that local building codes may govern in-wall electrical  
work, including proper specification of any wiring used  
and the way in which it is connected. You are respon-  
sible for making certain that all multiroom installation  
work is done properly and in compliance with all appli-  
cable codes and regulations.  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
MULTI-ROOMmenu (Figure 24) is on the  
⁄ ¤  
/
screen; then press the  
Navigation Buttons  
D
©
so that the cursor is pointing to the SB  
Figure 24  
‹ ›  
AMPSline. Press the  
/
Navigation Buttons  
D
©
so that MULTIis shown in highlighted  
When the MULTI-ROOMmenu appears, the  
cursor will be at the MULTI-ROOMline. Since  
this line is used to turn the system on and off, don’t  
make an adjustment here unless you wish to turn the  
system on at this time. To turn the system on, press the  
video. When this change is made, connect the wires  
feeding the remote zone speakers to the Surround  
Back/Multiroom Speaker Outputs E.  
When the SBL/SBR speakers are set for multiroom  
operation, you may still configure the AVR 445 for 7.1  
modes in the main listening room by making certain  
that the SURRBACKline in the SPEAKER  
SIZEmenu (Figure 18) is set to SMALLor  
LARGE, as shown in the instructions on pages  
29–30. When that is done, the word MULTIwill  
appear next to the large or small designator to alert  
you to the fact that the internal SBL/SBR amplifiers  
are assigned to the multiroom system, and that an  
optional, external two-channel power amplifier must be  
connected to the SBL/SBR Preamp Outputs ¡ in  
order to use surround back channel speakers.  
Navigation Button D  
©
so that ONis high-  
For standard installations, follow the instructions shown  
on pages 18–19 for the connection of speaker wire  
and IR remote wiring to the AVR 445.  
lighted. If you do not wish to turn the system on at this  
⁄ ¤  
/
time, or to proceed to the next step, press the  
Navigation Buttons D so that the on-screen  
cursor is next to the MULTIINline.  
©
For installations where the Surround Back Left/Right  
amplifier channels are used to power the remote zone,  
make certain that the system is configured for that  
type of operation, as shown on this page.  
44 MULTIROOM OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MULTIROOM OPERATION  
⁄ ¤  
Once this setting is made, press the  
Navigation Buttons D to select another  
configuration item on this page, or press the OSD  
Button U if you have completed your  
/
normally be used to control an AVR function such as  
To change the input source or volume in the remote  
zone from the room where the AVR is located, press  
the Multiroom Button Q. When the MULTI  
ON/OFFmessage appears in the Lower Display  
©
volume, source selection, tuner control or the opera-  
tion of an iPod docked to The Bridge. If any of the  
input devices are connected to the IR Output C or  
Full Carrier IR Output B, by either a hard-wire con-  
nection or through an optional IR “blaster,” you may  
adjustments to the Multiroom system.  
Line $, press the Set Button F and then  
⁄ ¤  
/
press the  
Navigation Buttons D so that the  
Infrared Output Selection  
use the Transport Controls  
π
on the ZR 10 to  
display changes to either MULTIINPUTor  
MULTILEVEL, depending on which setting  
The AVR 445 enables you to select which IR input  
will be used to feed the Full Carrier IR Output B.  
The factory default setting is the IR signal that is fed  
to the Multiroom IR Input N, but you may select  
other options.  
operate compatible Harman Kardon products.  
you wish to change. Press the Set Button F again  
To turn the system off from the remote room, press  
‹ ›  
/
and then use the  
Navigation Buttons D to  
the Power Off Button 0  
å. Remember that the  
change the input or volume. Press the Set Button F  
one more time to activate the command.  
AVR 445 may be turned on or off from the remote  
room, regardless of the system’s operation or status  
in the main room.  
To change this setting, first make sure that the  
MULTI-ROOMmenu is on the screen, and  
Navigation Buttons D©  
so that the cursor is next to CARRIEROUT;  
Note that the this volume adjustment controls the level  
for the output to the Multiroom Audio Outputs 8  
and for any speakers connected to the Surround  
Back/Multiroom Speaker Outputs E when the  
Surround Back amplifier channels are configured for  
Multiroom use, as shown on page 44. This adjustment  
does NOT change the volume level for any room  
where an A-BUS module is used, as that setting is  
only adjustable using the A-BUS module’s volume  
control or a remote pointed at the A-BUS module’s  
built-in sensor.  
NOTE: When XM Radio or the tuner is selected as  
the source for the remote zone, any change to the  
frequency or preset will also change the station being  
listened to in the main room, if the tuner is in use  
there. Similarly, if someone in the main room changes  
the station, the change will also have an impact on  
the remote room.  
⁄ ¤  
/
then press the  
then press the Set Button F  
⁄ ¤  
/
one of these options:  
œ. Press the  
Navigation Buttons D©  
to select  
ZONEIIfeeds the signal present at the  
Multiroom IR Input N to the Full Carrier IR  
Output B.  
To turn the multiroom system on or off from the  
room where the AVR is located, press the Multiroom  
Button Q. When the MULTI ON/OFF  
A-BUSfeeds the signal carried back from an  
optional A-BUS module connected to the AVR to  
the Full Carrier IR Output B.  
message appears in the Lower Display Line $  
‹ ›  
/
press the Set Button F and then press the  
FRONTfeeds the received through the front-  
panel Remote Sensor Window ^ to the Full  
Carrier IR Output B.  
Navigation Buttons D so that the display changes  
to MULTI ONor MULTI OFF, as desired.  
Press the Set Button F again to activate the  
command.  
When all the necessary adjustments to the  
MULTI-ROOMmenu have been made, press  
NOTE: The multiroom system will remain on even  
when the AVR is turned off in the main listening room  
where it is located. When the AVR 445’s multiroom  
system is turned on, but the unit is in the Standby  
mode (turned “off”) in the room where the AVR 445  
is located, the light surrounding the front-panel  
Standby/On Switch 0 will remain blue, rather than  
amber, and a MULTI-ROOMONmessage  
will be shown in the Lower Display Line D.  
⁄ ¤  
/
the  
Navigation Buttons D  
©
until the  
cursor is pointing to BACKTOMASTER  
MENUto make changes to other menus, or press  
the OSD Button U  
to exit the menu system  
and return to normal operation.  
Multiroom Operation  
When operating the AVR 445 from a remote room  
where an IR sensor or A-BUS module has been  
installed and properly connected back to the AVR,  
you may use either the main remote control, the  
ZR 10 or any remote programmed with standard  
Harman Kardon remote control codes. Unlike many  
other products, the AVR 445 does not use different  
codes for main room and remote room operation.  
When the Multiroom system is turned on, the input  
selected using the Multiroom menu will be fed to the  
Multiroom Audio Outputs 8 on the rear panel as  
well as the A-BUS Connector ¢. The volume will be  
as set in the previous selection, although it may also be  
adjusted using an optional IR sensor and the ZR 10  
remote in the remote location, or the A-BUS keypad,  
or on the optional audio power amplifier connected to  
the Multiroom Audio Outputs 8.  
To turn the AVR on from the remote room, simply  
point the remote at the sensor and press either the  
AVR Selector 4  
ç, any of the Input Selectors  
Although changes to the input source or remote room  
volume will normally be made using an IR sensor in  
the remote room that is connected to the AVR, it is  
also possible to change those settings from the main  
listening room. This is useful for situations where some  
or all of the remote rooms do not have an IR sensor,  
or to take control over the remote room without  
actually being in that room.  
3, or the discrete source selection buttons for  
inputs such as the Tuner  
ÉX, XM Radio  
ƒ
TM  
The  
or  
®. To turn the multiroom system  
Bridge  
off from a remote room, press the Power Off Button  
1.  
å
When the multiroom system is turned on, you may  
use the same buttons on either remote that would  
MULTIROOM OPERATION 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
The AVR 445 remote is factory-programmed for  
all functions needed to operate the unit. In addition,  
it is also preprogrammed to operate most recent  
Harman Kardon DVD players and changers, CD  
players and changers, CD recorders and cassette  
decks. The codes for other brand devices may be  
programmed into the AVR 445 remote using its  
extensive library of remote codes or a head-to-head  
learning process for codes not in the internal library.  
you wish to set the codes for appears. For this  
P R E S S  
C O D E  
A
N U M B E R  
example, we will select “TV” to enter the codes  
ne
S
ed
E
e
L
d
E
t
C
o
T
op
A
erate your TV.  
1
O F
 
1 0  
Figure 30  
D E V I C E  
T V  
8. After you press and release the number key,  
watch the device being programmed to see  
whether it turns off. As shown in the instructions  
that will appear on the next menu screen (Figure  
31), if your device has turned off, press the Set  
Button F, and then skip to Step 10. If the unit  
do
P
es
O
n
W
o
E
t
R
tur
O
n
F
o
F
ff,
?
proceed to the next step.  
Figure 27  
NOTE: The codes for hard-drive recorder products  
(DVR) such as TiVo® are programmed by selecting VCR  
as the device. For satellite-based TiVo products, check  
under the brand name of the product.  
As an alternative to the AVR remote, consider purchasing  
Harman Kardon’s TC 30 activity-based remote, which  
uses Web setup wizards to custom configure your remote.  
5. At the next menu screen on the remote (Figure  
28), press the Set Button F to enter the  
Manual mode, which means that you will select  
the brand name of the device from the list pro-  
grammed into t
D
he
E
V
re
I
m
C
o
E
te’s memory.  
Y
: S E T  
N :
 
N E X T
#
O R
 
C L R  
Figure 31  
Thanks to the remote’s advanced technology and  
two-line LCD, it is no longer necessary to look up  
cumbersome codes when programming the remote;  
following the steps outlined below, you simply search  
for the brand name from the remote’s memory. We  
recommend that you first try the preprogrammed code  
entry method. If that procedure is not successful, then  
try the code-learning method.  
9. If the device being programmed into the AVR  
remote does not turn off after you have pressed  
the “1” Button c, repeat Steps 7 and 8 by  
pressing the available numeric keys shown until  
the device turns off. If the device still does not turn  
off after all choices have been tried, or if there is  
only one number key shown as available to try,  
the code for this specific device is not in the AVR  
remote library under that brand name. If that is the  
case, press the Clear Button j to exit the  
manual programming mode. Remember that the  
codes may still be stored in the AVR remote’s  
library under another brand, and you can have the  
remote control search for them by following the  
instructions below for automatic programming.  
You may also manually “learn” the codes for most  
devices into the AVR remote by following the  
Learning Commands instructions on page 47.  
P R O G R A M  
M A N U A L  
Figure 28  
6. The next menu screen on the remote (Figure 29)  
will show the start of the list of available brands.  
¤
Press the  
/
Navigation Buttons D until  
Preprogrammed Code Entry  
the brand name of the device you are program-  
ming into the remote appears on the lower line of  
the display and then press the Set Button F.  
The easiest way to program the remote for operation  
with a source device from another brand is to follow  
these steps:  
S E L E C T
 
B R A N D  
R C A  
1. Turn on the power to the device you wish to pro-  
gram into the AVR remote. This is important, as in a  
later step you will need to see whether the device  
turns off to determine whether the remote has been  
programmed for the proper remote codes.  
Figure 29  
NOTE: If the brand name for the product you wish to  
program does not appear in the list, the codes may  
still be available, as some manufacturers share codes.  
If the desired brand is not listed, press the Clear  
Button j to exit the programming process, and  
skip to the instructions shown on page 47 for the  
“Automatic” method of programming the remote. If  
desired, or if the codes for your brand are not part  
of the remote’s library at all, you may still use the  
remote to program most infrared-controlled products  
by “learning” the commands from the product’s  
original remote into the AVR remote. The instructions  
for Learning Commands are on page 47.  
10. When the device being programmed does turn off  
after a numeric key has been pressed, you must  
press the Set Button F within 5 seconds to  
enter the setting into the remote’s memory. After  
you press the Set Button F, the top line of the  
LCD will read SAVING… and then the word  
SAVED will flash four times in the center of  
the bottom line.  
2. Press and hold the Program Button y for  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display c. Release the button  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
ap
H
pe
O
a
L
rs
D
.  
P R O G
 
B U T T O N  
F O R  
3
S E C O N D S  
Figure 25  
11. When the codes are saved, the remote will return  
to normal operation, and whenever you press  
the Input Selector Button d that was just  
programmed, the codes for the new device will  
be used. If no further buttons are pressed, the  
remote will revert back to the default setting for  
AVR commands.  
3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message  
(Figure 26), will appear in the LCD and  
the Set Button F will remain illuminated  
in red. Press the Set Button F to begin  
the process of selecting a device and locating  
the prope
M
r r
E
e
N
m
U
ote codes.  
7. The next step is important, as it determines which  
codes will operate the source device or display.  
Point the AVR remote at the device being pro-  
grammed and, following the instructions shown in  
the remote’s LCD Information Display c,  
press and release the Numeric Keys c shown  
on the menu screen (Figure 30) one at a time,  
starting with the “1” button. After you press the  
“1” Button c, the remote’s LCD screen will  
briefly go blank as the code is being transmitted,  
NOTE: Some brands share a common remote control  
code for “Power Off” for many models. For that rea-  
son, it is possible that even though the remote  
appears to be properly programmed, you may find  
that some buttons do not appear to issue the correct  
command. If this is the case, repeat the procedure  
outlined above, but if more than one numeric key selec-  
tion is suggested in Step 7, try a different number to  
M A I N  
P R O G R A M
 
D E V I C E  
Figure 26  
4. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in the LCD  
but you will see the “transmit” icon  
in the  
¤
(Figure 27). Press the  
/
Navigation Button  
upper right corner of the display to serve as  
confirmation that the remote is sending out  
commands.  
D to scroll through the list of device categories  
and press the Set Button F when the device  
46 CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
see whether the remote operates correctly. Although  
the AVR remote is preprogrammed with an extensive  
library of codes for many major brands, it is also possi-  
ble that you may have attempted to program a product  
that is too new or too old, and thus not all of its com-  
mands will be in the code library. You may fill in the  
codes for any button that does not operate properly  
by using the learning technique shown on this page.  
of the LCD screen while the bottom line reads  
11. When pressing the “1” button does not turn  
the device being programmed back on, repeat  
the procedure by trying the remainder of the  
Numeric Keys c in sequence, each time  
pressing and then releasing the button to see  
whether the new device turns back on. When it  
does, skip to the next step. However, if you try all  
10 numeric keys and find that the unit will not turn  
on, you won’t be able to use this method to program  
the device. Press the Clear Button j to exit  
the programming process. You’ll need to follow  
the Learning Commands instructions below to enter  
the codes for this device into the AVR remote.  
PLEASE WAIT. You will also see the transmit  
icon in the upper right corner of the LCD’s top  
line to remind you that the remote is working even  
though you may not see anything happening to  
the device being programmed.  
7. It will take a few seconds for the remote to send  
out the first group of commands, after which  
you will see a new display in the LCD screen, as  
shown in Figure 33. Following the instructions, if  
the device being programmed has not turned off,  
Automatic Code Entry  
In addition to manual code selection using the brand  
name list, it is also possible to automatically search  
through all the codes that are stored in the AVR remote’s  
library to see whether a device will respond even if it  
is not listed among the brands that appear when you  
program the remote manually. To automatically search  
through the codes that are available for a specific device  
type (e.g., DVD, VCR), follow these steps:  
press the Navigation Button D again to  
send another group of codes. If the device being  
programmed has turned off, skip to Step 9.  
12. When pressing one of the numeric keys in Step  
10 or 11 causes the device being programmed  
to turn back on, follow the instructions shown in  
Figure 33 and press the Set Button F within  
five seconds of the device turning on. After you  
press the Set button, the top line of the LCD will  
read SAVING… and then the word SAVED will  
flash four times in the center of the bottom line.  
P O W E R
 
O F F ?  
Y
-
>
1
~
0 N
 
-
>  
Figure 33  
8. By pressing the Navigation Button D  
1. Turn on the power to the device you wish to  
program into the AVR remote. This is important  
because in a later step you will need to see whether  
the device turns off to determine whether the remote  
has been programmed for the proper remote codes.  
again, the remote will send out a new set of  
commands. When it pauses, follow the instructions  
shown in Step 7. Depending on how many codes  
are stored for a specific device type, you may  
have to repeat this process as many as 15 times.  
Remember, if the device turns off, skip to Step 9.  
When all the codes for the device being pro-  
grammed have been tried, the instruction shown  
in Figure 34 will appear. This means that the  
codes for the product you are trying to program  
are not in the AVR remote library and you will  
have to “learn” them into the remote following the  
instructions shown in the next section. Press the  
Set Button F as instructed to exit the  
13. When the codes are saved, the remote will return  
to normal operation, and whenever you press  
the Input Selector Button d that was just  
programmed, the codes for the new device will  
be used. If no further buttons are pressed, the  
remote will revert back to the default setting for  
AVR commands.  
2. Press and hold the Program Button y for  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display c. Release the button  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
Learning Commands  
On occasions when the AVR remote does not contain  
the codes for a particular product’s remote in its built-  
in library, or when you wish to program a missing or  
special function into one button of a device, the AVR  
remote’s learning capability allows you to do that. To  
teach commands from one product’s remote into the  
AVR remote:  
3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Fig. 26)  
will appear in the LCD and the Set Button F  
will remain illuminated in red. Press the Set  
Button F to begin the process of selecting a  
device and locating the proper remote codes.  
programmin
E
g
N
p
D
rocess.  
R E A C H  
P O I N T  
E X I T
 
-
>
S E T
 
K E Y  
4. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in the LCD  
Figure 34  
¤
(Figure 27). Press the  
/
Navigation Button  
The AVR 445’s remote not only allows you to “learn”  
in the commands from any compatible remote; it also  
allows you to learn a separate code into the Input  
Selector Buttons d. This unique capability allows  
you to configure the remote so that whenever one of  
these buttons is pressed, the remote will not only  
select the codes for that device for itself, but it will  
transmit a separately programmed remote code. By  
programming the display’s input selection remote  
code for the specific device, you can, for example,  
press the VID 3/Cable Input Selector Button d  
and not only have the AVR switch to a cable set-top  
for audio selection and have the AVR remote use  
remote codes for the cable box, but you can send a  
code to the display that selects the input used for a  
direct connection between the set-top and your display.  
9. If the device being programmed does turn off  
after following the instructions in Step 7, you  
will need to verify the code set by pressing the  
Numeric Keys c in sequence, as instructed in  
Figure 33. Point the remote at the device being  
programmed, and press the “1” Button c to  
see whether the device turns back on.  
D to scroll through the list of device categories  
and press the Set Button F when the device  
for which you wish to set the codes appears.  
For this example, we will select “TV” to enter  
the codes needed to operate your TV.  
5. At the next menu screen on the remote, press the  
Navigation Button D so that the bottom  
line of the LCD reads AUTO (Figure 32) and then  
press the Set Button F to enter the  
Automatic progr
D
am
E
m
V
I
in
C
g
E
mode.  
10. After pressing and releasing the “1” Button c,  
check to see whether the device has turned back  
on. If it has, skip to Step 12. If it does not turn off,  
press the “2” Button c, or the next button in  
the numeric sequence if you are repeating the  
procedure, as instructed by the LCD screen in  
Figure 35.  
P R O G R A M  
A U T O  
Figure 32  
6. As instructed on the next menu screen, press  
P O W E R
 
O N ?  
the Navigation Button D to begin the  
Y
-
>
S E T
 
N -
>
1
~
0  
Before learning codes, note that all buttons on the  
remote may have a command “learned” except for  
Clear j, Program y, Light z and the  
Macro Buttons R.  
automatic code search process. Your confirmation  
that the remote is sending out commands is the  
movement of a square block across the top line  
Figure 35  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
The learning process requires that both the device’s  
original remote and the AVR remote be available.  
Before pressing any buttons on either remote, place  
them so that the IR transmitter on the remote from the  
device to be programmed is facing the Infrared Lens  
6. Once you press the button to be programmed on  
5 through 9 as often as needed to complete the  
code-learning process.  
the AVR remote, press and hold the button on the  
remote control for the device to be programmed  
within 5 seconds, as instructed on the next menu  
screen (Figure 39
O
).
N  
11. If you wish to change the name that appears in  
the LCD when the button that has just had a new  
code learned is pressed, press the Navigation  
j
on the AVR remote. The two remotes should be  
P R E S S
 
K E Y  
Button D so that the display shown in Figure  
43 appears in the LCD. Press the Set Button  
F to be taken to a RENAME KEY display.  
Enter the new name for the key following the  
instructions shown in the Renaming Individual  
Keys section of this manual on pages 53–54. If  
you find it more convenient to rename the buttons  
at a later time, you may do that separately by  
following the instructions on page 53.  
O R I G I N A L
 
R E M O T E  
no more than an inch apart, and there should not be  
any direct sunlight or other bright light source near  
the remotes.  
Figure 39  
7. Continue to hold the button on the original remote  
until the menu on the AVR remote’s LCD screen  
changes. If the code is successfully learned, you will  
see the display shown in Figure 40. If you see that  
message, proceed to Step 10. If the code is not  
successfully learned, you will see the display shown  
in Figure 41. If that menu appears, proceed to  
Steps 8 and
M
9
E
.
N U  
Learning Keys for an Entire Device Remote  
1. Press and hold the Program Button y for  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display c. Release the button  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
L E A R N
 
M E N U  
R E N A M E
 
K E Y  
Figure 43  
L E A R N  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Fig. 26),  
will appear in the LCD and the Set Button F  
L R N
 
A N O T H E R
 
K E Y  
12. When you have programmed all keys for the  
Figure 40  
desired device, press the Navigation Button  
will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
D when LEARN MENU (Figure 40) appears  
so that you see the display shown in Figure 44.  
Press the Set Button F to return the remote to  
no
L
rm
E
a
A
l
R
o
N
peration.  
L E A R N
 
F A I L E D  
R E T R Y  
Navigation Button D so that LEARN appears  
on the bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown  
in Figure 36. Press the Set Button F to begin  
the process of learning commands from another  
de
M
vi
A
ce
I
N
s remote into the AVR remote.  
Figure 41  
8. If the message shown in Figure 41 appears in  
the display, press the Set Button F to try  
programming the button again. When the remote  
prompts you to press and hold the key on the  
original remote again by showing the display  
shown in Figure 39, immediately press the button  
on the source remote again. To avoid another  
failed attempt, make certain that the windows on  
the two remotes are facing one another.  
M E N U  
E N D
 
L E A R N I N G  
M E N U  
L E A R N  
Figure 44  
Figure 36  
13. If you wish to program the codes for another  
device, repeat the procedure outline above, but  
select a different device in Step 4.  
3. To program the codes for a device’s remote into  
¤
the AVR remote, press the  
/
Navigation  
Buttons D until the words LEARNKEY  
appear in the bottom line of the LCD, as shown  
in Figure 37. Press the Set Button F to  
continue. If you wish to program one of the  
Input Selector buttons for a special code,  
follow the instructions shown below for  
“Device Selector Programming.  
Learning Codes for an Input Selector  
9. Continue to hold the button on the original remote  
until the LCD changes again. If the code was  
successfully learned, you will see the display  
shown in Figure 40. In that case, go to Step 10.  
If the LEARN FAILED display (Figure 41)  
appears again, you may either try to program the  
The AVR 445’s remote allows you to learn a specific  
code to be attached to one of the Input Selectors  
d so that whenever that button is pressed, you will  
not only be selecting that device as the AVR’s input and  
telling the remote to use the remote codes that have  
been programmed to belong to that device, it also allows  
you to have that special code transmitted, as well. This  
allows you to have an input (or other command) sent to  
a display so that when video sources are directly con-  
nected to the display, you can automatically command it  
to switch to the same input selected for the AVR.  
L E A R N  
key again, or press the Navigation Button  
L E A R N
 
K E Y  
D to stop the process. It is possible that some  
remotes may use code sequences or infrared  
frequencies that are not compatible with the  
AVR remote, and those codes cannot be learned.  
When the display shown in Figure 42 appears,  
press the Set Button F to exit the Learning  
system.  
Figure 37  
4. The SELECT A DEVICE message will appear  
¤
in the LCD (Figure 27). Press the  
/
Navigation  
Buttons D to scroll through the list of device  
categories and press the Set Button F when  
the device for which you wish to set the codes  
appears. For this example, we will select “TV” to  
enter the codes needed to operate your TV.  
To learn a remote code into one of the Input  
Selectors d, follow the same steps shown above  
for learning the keys for an entire device remote with  
the following exceptions:  
L E A R N
 
F A I L E D  
E X I T  
• In Step 3, press the /¤ Navigation Buttons  
D until LEARNDEVICEappears in the  
bottom line of the LCD.  
Figure 42  
5. The next menu screen (Figure 38) will prompt you  
to select the button, or “key,” on the AVR remote  
that you wish to program. Press that button on  
the AVR remote
K
.
E Y  
10. When a code has been learned successfully, you  
have a number of options. When the display  
• When the SELECTADEVICEmessage  
(Figure 27) appears, as described in Step 4, press  
the specific Input Selector Button d that you  
wish to have transmit a special code when it is  
pressed.  
shown in Figure 40 is on the LCD screen on the  
AVR remote, you may press the Set Button F  
to learn additional codes from the buttons on a  
source remote into the AVR remote. Follow Steps  
S E L E C T  
A
T O
 
P R O G R A M  
Figure 38  
48 CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
3. The next menu display is where you select the  
Input Select, or device, that you wish to change.  
When the display shown in Figure 46 appears,  
being transmitted, but you will see the “transmit”  
icon in the upper right corner of the display to  
serve as confirmation that the remote is sending  
out commands.  
• When the RENAMEDEVICEoption  
is offered by the remote after the code is pro-  
grammed, you will be changing the name that is  
shown in the remote’s LCD every time that Input  
Selector is pressed.  
¤
press the  
/
Navigation Button D to scroll  
through the list to find the device you wish to use  
for another function. In this case we will select  
“TV,” and show how to change it to take on the  
codes for operating a VCR. When that device’s  
7. After you press and release the number key,  
watch the device being programmed to see  
whether it turns off. As shown in the instructions  
that will appear on the next menu screen (Figure  
31), press the Set Button F, and then skip to  
Step 9. If the unit does not turn off, proceed to  
the next step.  
Changing Devices  
In the factory default settings, the AVR remote is  
programmed so that the commands transmitted  
correspond to the device selected by pressing one  
na
O
m
L
e
D
appears, press the Set Button  
F.  
D E V I C E
 
T Y P E  
T V  
of the Input Selectors  
3. This is logical, as you  
want the remote to control the device you have selected.  
However, in some circumstances you may have con-  
figured your system so that the devices connected to  
the AVR 445 do not correspond to the default device  
settings and the legends printed on the remote. For  
example, if your system has two VCRs you may con-  
nect the second VCR to the VID 2 input. There is no  
problem in doing that, but in normal operation the  
commands issued after selecting the VID 2 input are  
for a television, not a VCR.  
Figure 46  
8. If the device being programmed into the AVR  
remote does not turn off after you have pressed  
the “1” Button c, continue Steps 6 and 7 by  
pressing the available numeric keys shown until  
the device turns off. If the device still does not  
turn off after all choices have been tried, the code  
for this specific device is not in the AVR remote  
library under that brand name. If that is the case,  
we suggest that you press the Set Button F  
to accept the codes from another brand so that  
the programming is completed, but remember  
that you will then have to program the remote  
manually by following the Learning Commands  
instructions on page 47.  
4. Once the “old” device type has been selected,  
you need to tell the remote which set of remote  
codes to use as a replacement for the device just  
selected. When the instructions shown in Figure  
¤
47 appear, press the  
/
Navigation Button  
D to scroll through the list of device categories  
to find the name of the device that you wish to  
use. The old device name will remain on the left  
side of the LCD screen, while the replacement  
device list will scroll to its right. For example, press  
The AVR remote allows you to correct that situation  
through the “Changing Devices” process. This enables  
you to assign the codes from one type of device to  
a different button. For example, in the steps below,  
we will explain how to program the VID 2 buttons to  
provide the commands to operate a VCR. Of course,  
you may program the remote to have any of the devices  
take on the code set of any other device, as your  
system requires. And, with the AVR remote’s “Rename”  
function, you can even change the way the name of  
the device appears on the remote’s LCD so that you  
see exactly which commands are being sent.  
the Navigation Button D until the display  
screen reads TV<-VCR to have the VID 2/TV  
Button transmit the commands used to control a  
VCR. Press the Set Button F when the  
desired device combination appears.  
9. When the device being programmed does turn off  
after a numeric key has been pressed, you must  
press the Set Button F within five seconds to  
enter the setting into the remote’s memory. After  
you press the Set button, the top line of the LCD  
will read SAVING... and then the word SAVED  
will flash four times in the center of the bottom line.  
N E W
 
D E V I C E
 
T Y P E  
T V
<
- V C R  
Figure 47  
5. Once the new device is selected, the remainder of  
the process will select the codes for the specific  
brand to be used, and for that reason they are  
identical to the way a device is programmed using  
manual entry. Continue the process as outlined in  
the next few steps, remembering that if the codes  
for your specific device are not found, you may  
select any brand and then “learn” the proper  
To program the buttons normally assigned to one device  
for the commands of another, please follow these  
steps:  
10. When the codes are saved the remote will return  
to normal operation, and whenever you press  
the Input Selector Button  
3
that was just  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
O
for  
programmed, the display will show the original  
device-type code at the far left side of the display,  
with the name of the new code set type in brackets.  
For example, the display will read TV<-VCR in  
our example of replacing the TV codes with those  
for a VCR.  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
codes into the AVR remote using the process out-  
lined on page 49. To begin the process, start by  
selecting the brand of device, as shown in Fig. 29.  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
¤
Press the  
/
Navigation Button D until the  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
26), will appear in the LCD and the Set Button  
brand name of the device you are programming  
into the remote appears on the lower line of the  
display and then press the Set Button F.  
Macro Programming  
F will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
Macros enable you to easily repeat frequently used  
combinations of multiple remote control commands  
with the touch of a single button. Once a macro is  
programmed, you may send up to 20 commands with  
one press of the Power On or Macro buttons. This will  
greatly simplify the process of turning on your system,  
changing devices or other common tasks. Thanks  
to the remote’s two-line display, it is easier than ever  
for you to take advantage of the power of macro  
commands.  
Navigation Button D twice so that CHANGE  
DEVICE appears on the bottom line of the LCD  
screen, as shown in Figure 45. Press the Set  
Button F to begin the process of reassigning  
the commands used for a particular device.  
6. The next step is important, as it determines which  
codes will operate the source device or display.  
Point the AVR remote at the device being pro-  
grammed and, following the instructions shown  
M A I N
 
M E N U  
on the remote’s LCD Information Display  
2,  
C H A N G E
 
D E V I C E  
press and release the Numeric Keys c one at  
a time, starting with the “1” Button c. After  
you press the “1” Button c, the remote’s  
LCD screen will briefly go blank as the code is  
Figure 45  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Recording a Macro  
To record a macro into the remote’s memory, follow  
these steps:  
in the order you wish them to be transmitted.  
As each button is pressed to enter it into the  
macro, you will see the button names appear and  
then scroll up on the LCD as your confirmation of  
the key entry (Figure 54).  
Remember that when you want to change devices,  
you must first press the Input Selectors d  
for that button, and then press the Command or  
Function key. Since we want to program a series  
of events that occur each time the Power On  
button is pressed, press the AVR button. In your  
sp
S
ec
E
if
L
ic
E
m
C
T
acro,
D
th
E
is
V
is
I
C
th
E
e first command button.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
y
for  
10. When all commands for the macro have been  
entered, press the Set Button F to save the  
macro. The display screen will show the button  
to which the macro has been programmed and  
the number of steps used, and the word SAVED  
will blink four times in the lower line of the LCD.  
When the display returns to normal, the macro  
has been entered and the remote is ready for  
operation.  
2. Release the button  
A
A V R  
Figure 52  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
26), will appear in the LCD and the Set Button  
F will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
7. The next display (Figure 53) and the subsequent  
screens are where the actual macro programming  
takes place. The words at the left side of the top  
line of the display show the button that is being  
Navigation Button D so that MACRO  
appears on the bottom line of the LCD, as shown  
in Figure 48. Press the Set Button F to enter  
the main macro menu branch.  
11. If a macro has been programmed into the Power  
On Button  
1, it will play back anytime the  
programmed (e.g., the Power On Button  
1
or  
Power On button is pressed. As the macro plays,  
you will see the steps appear in the remote’s LCD.  
Macros programmed into one of the four discrete  
Macro buttons may be activated at any time by  
pressing the appropriate button.  
one of the Macro Buttons ) and the indica-  
R
M A I N
 
M E N U  
M A C R O  
tion at the right side of the top line shows the  
number of macro steps available of 20 possible  
steps. Following the instructions on the remote’s  
LCD screen, press the first key you wish to be  
transmitted in the macro. In our example, we first  
want the AVR 445 to turn on, so the Power  
Bu
P
tt
O
o
W
n
E
1
R
should be pressed.  
Figure 48  
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 49) press the  
Set Button F to begin recording a macro.  
Erasing a Macro  
Once a macro has been created and stored in the  
AVR remote’s memory, you have the option of  
erasing it. You may do this at any time by following  
these steps:  
M A C R O  
R E C O R D  
A
M A C R O  
O N  
0 0 / 2 0  
Figure 49  
S E L E C T
 
K E Y
 
P R E S S  
Figure 53  
4. The next display screen (Figure 50) is where you  
select the button that will be used to recall the  
macro. The choices are the Power On Button  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
O
for  
8. Once the first command button for the macro has  
been pressed, continue to press the buttons you  
wish to be part of the macro, in the order they will  
be used. Press each button within five seconds  
of the last button, remembering to press the  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
1
or one of the discrete Macro Buttons  
R
.
¤
Press the  
/
Navigation Button D until  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
the name of the button you wish to program the  
macro into is shown. For this example we will  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
Input Selector  
3
when you are changing  
show how to program a series of commands that  
will automatically be sent out every time the  
Power button
A
is
M
pr
A
e
C
ss
R
e
O
d.  
device functions. As the buttons on the remote  
are pressed, the remote’s display screen will  
show the steps in the macro as they are  
programmed (Figure 54).  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
26), will appear in the LCD and the Set Button  
F will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
R E C O R D  
Navigation Button D so that MACRO  
P O W E R
 
O N  
appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen, as  
shown in Figure 48. Press the Set Button F to  
enter the main macro menu branch.  
[ A V R ]  
Figure 50  
[ A V R ]
 
P O W E R
 
O N  
Figure 54  
5. The next screen that appears (Figure 51) is where  
you select the device for the first command that  
will be sent out as part of the macro. Press the  
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 55), press the  
9. For our example, we first want the AVR Power  
On button pressed, followed by the TV Power On,  
followed by the Cable Box On, followed by the  
selection of the Logic 7 mode. To do that, press  
the buttons in this order:  
¤
/
Navigation Button D until the bottom  
¤
/
Navigation Button D until the name of  
line in the remote’s LCD reads ERASE A MACRO.  
Press the Set Button F to begin the process  
of
M
e
A
ra
C
si
R
ng
O
a macro.  
the device appears on the left side of the lower  
line in the LCD. For this example, the first button  
we want to have the macro “press” is the Power  
On button, so the AVR device is selected. Press the  
Set Button F when the desired device name  
ap
S
pe
E
a
L
rs
E
t
C
o
T
m
A
ove to the next programming step.  
Power On  
1
E R A S E  
A
M A C R O  
VID 2/TV  
3
Figure 55  
Power On  
1
VID 3/Cable  
Power On  
AVR  
Logic 7  
3
4. The next display screen (Figure 56) is where you  
select which macro will be erased. Press the  
D E V I C E  
A V R  
1
4
¤
/
Navigation Button D until the number  
Figure 51  
h
of the macro you wish to erase appears. For  
this example, we will erase the Power On macro  
created in the previous section. When the name  
6. The next display (Figure 52) is where you begin  
entering the individual commands for the macro,  
50 CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
of the macro to be erased appears, press the  
tion, navigation or any other button, it will appear  
next to the bracketed readout of the underlying  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
V O L U M E  
Set Button
A
F.  
device (e.g., [AVR] POWER ON).  
E R A S E  
M A C R O  
Figure 60  
P O W E R
 
O N  
6. When you are finished reviewing the macro’s  
contents, press the Set Button F to return  
the remote to normal operation.  
4. The next display screen (Figure 61) is where  
you select the device that will receive the punch-  
through commands. In our example, that is the  
VID 2/TV button, as that is where we want the  
AVR 445’s volume controls to be active. Press  
Figure 56  
5. The word ERASED will flash four times in the  
bottom line of the remote’s LCD, and then the  
display will return to its normal condition. When  
that happens, the macro is erased and the remote  
is returned to normal operation.  
Punch-Through Configuration  
Punch-through is a capability of the remote that  
allows the Volume controls, Channel Up/Down buttons  
or Transport keys (Play, Stop, Record, Fast Forward  
and Reverse, and Skip Up/Down) to link to a different  
device. For example, if your TV, cable box or satellite  
receiver is connected through the AVR 445, you will  
most likely want to use the AVR 445’s volume control  
commands even when the remote has been set to  
issue all other commands for the video device.  
“Punch-through” enables you to easily program the  
remote to do this.  
¤
the  
/
Navigation Button D until the  
name of the base device appears and then  
press the Se
I
t
N
Button F.  
Read a Macro  
To check the commands stored in the remote’s memory  
for one of the buttons, follow these steps:  
D E V I C E  
T V  
U S E  
Figure 61  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
O
for  
5. At the next display screen (Figure 62), you will  
select the device whose Volume Up/Down and  
Mute commands will be used. Press the  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
¤
/
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
Navigation Button D until the desired device’s  
name appears to the right of the device in use.  
In our example, that is the AVR 445 (indicated by  
AVR). When the desired combination of devices  
ap
P
pe
U
a
N
rs
C
,
H
pr
-
e
T
ss
H
t
R
h
O
e
U
S
G
et
H
Button F.  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
Volume Punch-Through  
Follow these steps to enable the Volume Up/Down  
and Mute controls from one device to be used when  
the remote is otherwise programmed for a different  
device.  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Fig. 26),  
will appear in the LCD and the Set Button F  
will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
T V
<
- A V R  
Navigation Button D so that MACRO  
appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen, as  
shown in Figure 48. Press the Set Button F  
to enter the main macro menu branch.  
NOTE FOR VOLUME PUNCH-THROUGH: The  
remote’s default settings are for the AVR 445’s vol-  
ume controls, to be used when any input or device is  
selected, with the exception of the VID 2/TV button.  
There is no need to program the remote for volume  
punch-through for the AVR 445’s controls with other  
sources, such as DVD. To have the AVR 445’s volume  
commands used when the TV device is selected, fol-  
low these steps:  
Figure 62  
6. When the Set button is pressed, the display will  
change to show you that the new combination of  
control commands is being saved to the unit’s  
memory, as shown in Figure 63. The word  
SAVED will flash four times and then the  
remote will return to normal operation.  
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 57), press the  
¤
/
Navigation Button D until the bottom  
line in the remote’s LCD shows READ A MACRO.  
Press the Set Button F to begin the process  
of
M
er
A
a
C
sin
R
g
O
a macro.  
T V
<
- A V R
 
[ V O L ]  
S A V E D  
R E A D  
A
M A C R O  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
O
for  
Figure 63  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
Figure 57  
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the  
Volume Up/Down and Mute buttons of the second  
device named will be used when those buttons  
Hi are pressed while the master device  
is in use.  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
4. The next display screen (Figure 58) is where you  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
¤
select the macro to be read. Press the  
/
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
Navigation Button D until the name of the  
macro you wish to read appears. For this example,  
we will read back the Power On macro created in  
a previous section. When the name of the macro  
to
R
b
E
e
A
e
D
ras
A
ed
M
a
A
pp
C
e
R
a
O
rs, press the Set Button F.  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
26), will appear in the LCD and the Set Button  
F will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
Returning the Volume Control Settings to  
Default Operation  
If you wish to remove the Volume punch-through so  
that the commands for Volume and Mute are returned  
to the factory default setting, follow the steps shown  
above, except that in Steps 4 and 5, select the same  
device for both the DEVICE IN USE on the left  
side of the bottom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH  
device. In the example used, the display to return the  
remote to default settings will appear as shown in  
Figure
P
6
U
4.
N C H - T H R O U G H  
¤
/
Navigation Button D until PUNCH-  
P O W E R
 
O N  
THROUGH appears on the bottom line of the  
LCD screen, as shown in Figure 59. Press the  
Set Button F to enter the main punch-through  
menu branch.  
Figure 58  
5. As soon as the Set button is pressed, the first two  
steps in the macro will be appear in the remote’s  
M A I N
 
M E N U  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
¤
LCD screen. You may then use the  
/
Navigation Button D to step up or down  
through the list of commands stored as the  
macro. As you read the display, you will see Input  
Figure 59  
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 60), press the  
Set Button F to begin programming the  
remote for Volume punch-through.  
T V
<
- T V  
Selector Buttons  
3
appear in brackets (e.g.,  
[AVR]). When the step in the macro is a func-  
Figure 64  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Channel Punch-Through  
Button D until the desired device name  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
26), will appear in the LCD and the Set Button  
F will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
Channel punch-through allows the Channel Up/Down  
buttons to send commands to a different device than  
the one selected for other commands. For example,  
you may wish to use a cable box or satellite receiver  
as the source for a VCR, so you would want the  
Channel Up/Down Buttons Y to transmit com-  
mands to the cable box even though the other button  
commands are programmed to operate the VCR.  
appears to the right of the device in use. In  
our example, that is the cable box. When the  
desired combination of devices appears, press  
the Set Button F.  
¤
/
Navigation Button D until PUNCH-  
THROUGH appears on the bottom line of the  
LCD screen, as shown in Figure 59. Press the  
Set Button F to enter the main punch-through  
menu branch.  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
V C R
<
- C B L  
Figure 67  
¤
3. At the next menu screen, press the  
/
6. When the Set button is pressed, the display will  
change to show you that the new combination  
of control commands is being saved to the unit’s  
memory, as shown in Figure 68. The word  
SAVED will flash four times and then the  
remote will return to normal operation.  
To program the remote for channel punch-through,  
follow these steps. This example will show how to  
program channel punch-through so that the com-  
mands programmed for Channel Up/Down for the  
VID 3/Cable device will be transmitted when the  
VID 1/VCR device has been selected as the  
current device.  
Navigation Button D until TRANSPORT  
appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen, as  
shown in Figure 70. Press the Set Button F  
to begin programming the remote for transport  
punch-through.  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
T R A N S P O R T  
V C R
<
- C B L
 
[ C H A N ]  
S A V E D  
Figure 70  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
O
for  
Figure 68  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
4. The next display screen (Figure 71) selects the  
device that will receive the punch-through com-  
mands. In our example, that is the TV button, as  
that is where we want the VCR’s transport controls  
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the  
Channel Up/Down Buttons of the second device  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
named will be used when those buttons  
Y
are  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
pressed while the master device is in use.  
¤
to be active. Press the  
/
Navigation Button  
Returning the Channel Control Settings to  
Default Operation  
If you wish to remove the Channel Punch-Through  
so that the commands for Channel Up/Down are  
D until the name of the base device appears  
an
D
d
E
th
V
e
I
n
C
p
E
re
I
ss
N
the Set Button F.  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
26), will appear in the LCD and the Set Button  
F will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
U S E  
T V  
¤
/
Navigation Button D until PUNCH-  
returned to the factory default setting, follow the steps  
shown above, except that in Steps 4 and 5, select  
the same device for both the DEVICE IN USE on  
the left side of the bottom line and the PUNCH-  
THROUGH device. In the example used, the display  
to return the remote to default settings will appear as  
shown
P
in
U
F
N
ig
C
u
H
re
-
T
6
H
9.
R O U G H  
THROUGH appears on the bottom line of the  
LCD screen, as shown in Figure 59. Press the  
Set Button F to enter the main punch-through  
menu branch.  
Figure 71  
5. At the next display screen (Figure 72), select the  
device whose transport commands will be used.  
¤
Press the  
/
Navigation Button D until the  
¤
3. At the next menu screen, press the  
/
desired device name appears to the right of the  
device in use. In our example, that is the VCR.  
When the desired combination of devices  
ap
P
pe
U
a
N
rs
C
,
H
pr
-
e
T
ss
H
t
R
he
O
U
S
G
et
H
Button F.  
Navigation Button D until CHANNEL  
appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen,  
as shown in Figure 65. Press the Set Button  
F to begin programming the remote for  
Channel punch-through.  
V C R
<
- V C R  
Figure 69  
T V
<
- V C R  
Transport Punch-Through  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
Figure 72  
C H A N N E L  
The Play  
G
, Stop  
, Record  
Transport Controls are set at the factory to oper-  
J
, Fast Forward/Reverse  
I
K
, Pause  
J
J
and Skip Up/Down  
6. When the Set button is pressed, the display will  
change to show you that the new combination of  
control commands is being saved to the unit’s  
memory, as shown in Figure 73. The word  
SAVED will flash four times and then the  
remote will return to normal operation.  
Figure 65  
4. The next display screen (Figure 66) is where you  
select the device that will receive the punch-  
through commands. In our example, that is the  
VID 2/TV button, as that is where we want the  
cable box’s channel controls to be active. Press  
ate your DVD player, or the controls of a specific  
device such as a VCR or CD player when they are  
selected. However, by using the Transport Punch-  
Through feature you may program these controls to  
transmit the commands for a different device. For  
example, you may wish to operate the transport of a  
second VCR connected to the VID 2/TV input, as  
shown in the following example.  
T V
<
- V C R
 
[ T R S ]  
¤
S A V E D  
the  
/
Navigation Button D until the  
name of the base device appears and then  
Figure 73  
press the Se
I
t
N
Button F.  
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the  
transport buttons of the second device named  
will be used when those buttons are pressed  
while the master device is in use.  
D E V I C E  
V C R  
U S E  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
O
for  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Figure 66  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
5. At the next display screen (Figure 67), you will  
select the device whose Channel Up/Down com-  
when the light under the Set Button F  
turns red.  
¤
mands will be used. Press the  
/
Navigation  
52 CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Returning the Transport Control Settings to  
Default Operation  
4. The next display screen (Figure 77) is where  
you select the device that will be renamed. In  
our example, that is the TV button. Press the  
8. Repeat Step 7 as needed to enter all the needed  
letters, numbers, characters and spaces.  
If you wish to remove the Transport Punch-Through so  
that the transport commands are returned to the fac-  
tory default setting, follow the steps shown above,  
except that in Steps 4 and 5, select the same device  
for both the DEVICE IN USE on the left side of the  
bottom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH device. In  
the example used, the display to return the remote to  
default
P
s
U
et
N
tin
C
g
H
s
-
w
T
il
H
l a
R
p
O
p
U
ea
G
r
H
as shown in Figure 74.  
9. When the text entry is complete, press the  
Set Button F. The LCD will blink DEVICE  
RENAMED three times and then return to  
normal operation.  
¤
/
Navigation Button D until the name  
of the base device appears and then press the  
Set Button F.  
R E N A M E
 
D E V I C E  
T V  
Once a device is renamed you will see the new name  
on the top line of the remote’s LCD whenever the  
Figure 77  
Input//Device Selector  
3
is pressed, or when any  
5. At the next menu screen, you will see the device  
name on the bottom line of the display with a  
blinking cursor box to the right of the device  
other command/function button on the remote is  
pressed after the main Device Selector is pressed.  
Note that renaming a device in the remote will not  
change the name of the input used by the on-screen  
menu system of the AVR 445.  
T V
<
- T V  
Figure 74  
name. Press the Navigation Button D to  
return the blinking cursor to the far left side of the  
display line. You may then retitle the device name  
as shown in the next step.  
Renaming  
While the names given to the buttons and inputs  
on the remote represent recognizable categories of  
audio/video products, system operation may be easier  
if the displays shown in the remote’s LCD screen are  
customized to reflect the specific characteristics of a  
playback source’s brand name or the new function  
given to a specific button when one remote’s controls  
are programmed into the AVR remote. The AVR  
remote allows you to change the name of either a  
master device or any button on the remote using the  
following steps.  
NOTES ON RENAMING DEVICES:  
• To move the cursor to the right or left of the display  
6. To enter the new name, press the Numeric Keys  
c. The letters above the numbered buttons  
indicate which letter or symbol will appear when  
the button is pressed during the renaming  
‹ ›  
/
during the renaming process, press the  
Navigation Buttons D as required.  
• The table below shows the letters, numbers and  
characters that may be accessed by pressing the  
Numeric Keys:  
process. The first press of the button will enter the  
first letter shown, subsequent presses of the same  
button will change the display to the other letters  
above that numbered key. For example, since the  
first letter we need to rename the input to HDTV  
Tuner is an “H”, you would locate the “H” above  
the “4” button, and press the button twice. The  
first press shows a “G,” the second press changes  
it to an “H.” Consult the table at the end of this  
section to see which characters pressing a partic-  
ular button generates.  
Key  
1
2
3
4
Characters  
[,],/,1  
A,B,C,2  
D,E,F,3  
G,H,I,4  
J,K,L,5  
Key  
6
7
8
9
Characters  
M,N,O,6  
P,Q,R,S,7  
T,U,V,8  
W,X,Y,Z,9  
-,.,#,0  
Renaming a Device  
To rename a specific device/input source button, fol-  
low these steps. For this example, we will show you  
how to rename the Device/Input Selector normally  
shown as “TV” to “HDTV TUNER.”  
5
0
• Renaming a device changes the name of the  
device only, not any of the individual key functions  
within that device memory. To change the name of  
an individual device, follow the instructions in the  
next section.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
O
for  
7. After you enter the first letter of the new device  
name, there are three options for entering the next  
character:  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
Renaming Individual Keys  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
a. To enter a letter that requires a different  
numeric key to be pressed, simply press that  
button. The cursor will automatically move to  
the next position and the first letter accessed  
by the new button will appear. Following our  
example, the next letter needed is a “D,” so  
you would press the “3” button once.  
Thanks to the programming flexibility of the AVR  
remote, an individual button on the remote may be  
assigned a feature or function that is different from the  
name that appears as the factory default when the  
button is pressed. However, with the Rename Key  
function it is possible to rename almost any button on  
the remote so that when the button is pressed you will  
see a more descriptive or appropriate name displayed.  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure 26),  
will appear in the LCD and the Set Button  
q
¤
will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
/
Navigation Button D until RENAME appears  
on the bottom line of the LCD screen,  
as
M
s
A
ho
I
w
N
n
M
in
E
F
N
ig
U
ure 75.  
b. To enter a letter that uses the same numeric  
To rename a specific button on the remote, follow  
these steps. For this example, we will show you how  
key, you must first press the Navigation  
R E N A M E  
Button D to move the blinking cursor block  
to the next position. Then press the Numeric  
Key c as required to enter the desired letter.  
to rename the DSP Surround Mode Selector  
6,  
Figure 75  
which is normally not used when DVD is selected,  
¤
3. At the next menu screen, press the  
/
so that it reads ZOOM in the remote’s display.  
Navigation Button D until RENAME  
DEVICE appears on the bottom line of the  
LCD screen, as shown in Figure 76. Press the  
Set Button F to begin renaming a device.  
c. To enter a blank space, press the Navigation  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
O
for  
Button D twice. The first press will move the  
cursor to the right, and the second press will  
move the cursor one more space to the right,  
leaving a blank space between the last letter  
and the next one.  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
R E N A M E  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
R E N A M E
 
D E V I C E  
Figure 76  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure 26),  
will appear in the LCD and the Set Button F  
7. To enter the new name for the key, press the  
b. If you have no additional keys to rename, press  
Numeric Keys c. The letters above the  
numbered buttons indicate which letters or sym-  
bols will appear when the button is pressed during  
the renaming process. The first press of the button  
will enter the first character shown, subsequent  
presses will change the display to the other letters  
above that numbered key. For example, since the  
first letter we need to rename the Tone button to  
Zoom is a “Z,” so you would locate the “Z” above  
the “9” button, and press the button four times.  
The first press shows a “W,the subsequent  
presses step through the other letters available  
until the “Z” appears. Consult the table on this  
page to see which characters are available  
by pressing a particular button.  
the Navigation Button D once so that  
¤
will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
/
the menu screen displays EXIT on the bottom  
line of the display. Press the Set Button F  
to return the remote to normal operation.  
Navigation Button D until RENAME appears  
on the bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown  
in Figure 75.  
NOTES ON RENAMING KEYS:  
¤
3. At the next menu screen press the  
/
• Renaming a key does not change its function. You  
may change the function of an individual key by  
learning a new code into the remote. See page 45  
for more information.  
Navigation Button D until RENAME KEY  
appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen, as  
shown in Figure 78. Press the Set Button F  
to
R
c
E
on
N
ti
A
nu
M
e
E
.  
• When a key is renamed it will only apply to the  
specific device selected in Step 4. The same key  
may be renamed as needed for each individual  
device with which it is used.  
R E N A M E
 
K E Y  
Figure 78  
4. The next display screen (Figure 79) selects the  
device within which the key to be renamed exists.  
Resetting the Remote  
8. After you enter the first letter of the new device  
name, there are three options for entering the  
next character:  
¤
Press the  
/
Navigation Buttons D until  
Depending on the way in which the remote has been  
programmed, there may be a situation where you wish  
to totally erase all changes that have been made to  
the remote and return it to the factory defaults. You  
may do that by following the steps shown below, but  
remember that once the remote is reset, ALL changes  
that have been made, including programming for use  
with other devices, learned keys, macros, punch-  
through settings and key names, will be erased and  
any settings you had previously made will have  
to be reentered.  
the name of the base device appears. In our  
example, since we want to rename a button within  
the DVD device memory, DVD should appear  
in the lower line of the LCD. When the desired  
device name
A
appears, press the Set Button F.  
a. To enter a letter that requires a different numeric  
key to be pressed, simply press that button.  
The cursor will automatically move to the next  
position and the first letter accessed by the new  
button will appear. Following our example, the  
next letter needed is an “O,” so you would press  
the “6” button once.  
S E L E C T  
D V D  
D E V I C E  
Figure 79  
5. At the next menu screen, select the first button  
within the device to be renamed, as instructed in  
the display shown in Figure 80. Select the button  
by
S
s
E
im
L
p
E
ly
C
T
pressing it on the remote.  
b. To enter a letter that uses the same numeric  
key, you must first press the Navigation  
To erase all settings and reset the remote to the  
original factory default settings and displays, follow  
these steps:  
Button D to move the blinking cursor block  
to the next position. Then press the Numeric  
Key c as required to enter the desired letter.  
This is the way you would enter the second “O”  
in the word ZOOM, and again for the letter “M.”  
A
K E Y  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
O
for  
Figure 80  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
c. To enter a blank space, press the Navigation  
6. Depending on whether or not the button pressed  
already has a named function within the device  
selected, one of two things will happen.  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
Button D twice. The first press will move the  
cursor to the right, and the second press will  
move the cursor one more space to the right,  
leaving a blank space between the last letter  
and the next one.  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
a. If the button to be renamed already has a pre-  
programmed, or previously renamed title in the  
remote’s memory, you will see that name on  
the top line of the LCD, and a blinking block  
cursor will appear on the far left side of the bottom  
line of the display, as shown in Figure 81.  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure 26),  
will appear in the LCD and the Set Button F  
¤
will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
/
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 as needed to complete  
entering the needed letters, numbers, characters  
and spaces.  
Navigation Button D until USER RESET  
appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen,  
as
M
s
A
ho
I
w
N
n
M
in
E
F
N
ig
U
ure 83.  
D I S C
 
S K I P  
10. When the text entry is complete, press the Set  
Button F. The new name will be entered into  
the remote’s memory, replacing the default name.  
U S E R
 
R E S E T  
Figure 81  
Figure 83  
b. If the button to be renamed does not have a  
function in the device selected, the top line of  
the LCD screen will be blank, and a blinking  
block cursor will appear on the far left side  
of the bottom line of the display, as shown  
in Figure 82.  
11. At this point, you have two options:  
3. Press the Set Button F to reset the remote.  
Note that once the Set Button is pressed the  
process may not be stopped. While the remote’s  
memory is being cleared, a RESETTING...  
message will appear in the upper line of the  
remote’s LCD screen, as shown in Figure 84.  
It may take a few minutes for the reset process  
to take place, and the length of time will vary  
a. If you wish to program an additional key within  
the same device, press the Set Button F as  
instructed by the bottom line of the LCD reading  
ANOTHER KEY. The remote will return to  
the SELECT A KEY menu option as shown  
in Step 6. Repeat the instructions in Steps 6  
though 11 to rename the next key.  
Figure 82  
54 CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
depending on how much customization and program-  
ming has taken place. Please be patient; as long as  
the message appears in the display, the remote is  
functioning properly.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button y for  
about 3 seconds while the message shown in  
Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD. Release  
the button when the red light under the Set  
Button F appears.  
D E V I C E
 
P R I O R I T Y  
N O R M A L  
Figure 87  
• When NORMAL appears on the bottom line of  
the LCD, the AVR remote will revert to AVR control  
5 seconds after the last button press, when you  
are controlling a source device.  
R E S E T T I N G . . .  
2. When the remote’s MAIN MENU message  
Figure 84  
(Figure 26) appears in the LCD and the Set Button  
¤
F remains illuminated in red, press the  
/
4. When the remote has been totally reset and  
returned to the factory default condition, a  
REMOTE RESET COMPLETE message will  
appear (Figure 85) briefly, and then the remote  
will return to normal operation.  
Navigation Button D until BACK LIGHT  
appears in the bottom line of the LCD screen,  
as shown in Figure 88.  
• When EXTENDED appears on the bottom line of  
the LCD, the AVR remote will revert to AVR control  
12 seconds after the last button press, when you  
are controlling a source device.  
M A I N
 
M E N U  
B A C K
 
L I G H T  
R E M O T E
 
R E S E T  
• When LAST USED appears on the bottom  
line of the LCD, once you press one of the Input  
Selectors d, the AVR remote will continue to  
operate as with the codes for the selected source  
device, until another device is selected. If you  
choose this option, please remember that you will  
have to press the AVR Selector e in order to  
use the remote to operate the AVR for functions  
such as surround mode selection, but the Volume  
and Mute controls will continue to remain active in  
their AVR modes at all times.  
C O M P L E T E  
Figure 88  
Figure 85  
3. Press the Set Button F and then press the  
Device Priority Timing  
¤
/
Navigation Buttons D again so that  
ON FULL appears in the bottom line of the LCD,  
The remote’s Device Priority mode allows you to  
select the length of time that the remote continues to  
issue codes for a device other than the AVR once you  
use the remote to control a source or other product.  
The default operation for the remote is to have all  
buttons on the remote return to their AVR functions  
5 seconds after the last button press. However, you  
may program the AVR remote to remain active as the  
source device remote for 12 seconds, or to keep the  
source device’s codes active until another Input  
Selector d is pressed. If you wish to keep the  
default setting of a 5-second return, no changes  
are needed.  
as shown in Figure 89.  
B A C K
 
L I G H T  
O N
 
F U L L  
Figure 89  
4. Press the Set Button F one more time. The  
LCD will show the word SAVING on the top line  
for about 2 seconds and then flash SAVED four  
times on the bottom line to indicate that the setting  
has been accepted by the remote’s memory.  
4. Press the Set Button F one more time. The  
LCD will show the word SAVING on the top line  
for about 2 seconds and then flash SAVED four  
times on the bottom line to indicate that the setting  
has been accepted by the remote’s memory.  
5. The remote’s backlighting will now turn on whenever  
a button is pressed. To revert to the original setting,  
follow the four steps shown above, but in Step 3,  
select the option that has the word NORMAL on  
the bottom line of the LCD.  
Backlight Options  
To change the device priority timing, follow  
these steps:  
The AVR 445’s remote has a built-in backlight system  
that makes it easier to use the remote when the room  
lighting is dimmed for an optimal home theater experi-  
ence. To turn the backlighting on, simply press the  
Light Button z. That button is made from a spe-  
cial “glow” material that makes it easier to find in dark  
rooms. This glow feature does not use any battery  
power, so the glow will fade when the remote is kept  
in a dark room for an extended period of time. You  
may “recharge” it by placing the remote in normal  
room lighting for a few hours.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button y for  
about 3 seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 25 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display c. Release the button  
when the red light under the Set Button F  
appears.  
Additional Notes on Configuring and Operating  
the Remote  
• When the remote is being programmed, it will auto-  
matically time-out if no button is pressed within a  
30-second period. The message shown in Figure 90  
will appear briefly, and the remote will then exit the  
feature being programmed and any data entered will  
be
T
lo
I
s
M
t.
E  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Fig. 26)  
will appear in the LCD and the Set Button F  
¤
will remain illuminated in red. Press the  
/
Once the Light Button z is pressed, the remote’s  
backlighting will remain on for approximately 7 sec-  
onds, and when you press any button on the remote  
while the backlighting is on, the light will stay on for  
another 7 seconds. However, the remote’s “Couch”  
function will conserve battery power by turning both  
the backlighting and the LCD off when any button is  
pressed for more than 30 seconds.  
Navigation Buttons D until DEVICE  
O U T
 
O R  
C L R
 
K E Y
 
P R E S S E D  
PRIORITY appears in the bottom line of the  
LCD, as shown in Figure 86, and press the  
Set Button F.  
Figure 90  
• The programming or configuration process may  
also be stopped at any time by pressing the Clear  
M A I N
 
M E N U  
D E V I C E
 
P R I O R I T Y  
Button  
9. The message shown in Figure 90  
will appear, the data entered in the current process  
will be lost and the remote will return to normal  
operation. Any process that was underway when  
the button will be pressed must be restarted.  
Figure 86  
You may also configure the remote so that the back-  
lighting will come on, any time a button is pressed.  
To set this option, follow these steps:  
3. When the DEVICE PRIORITY message  
appears in the remote’s LCD (Figure 87), press the  
¤
/
Navigation Buttons D to select the  
option that best suits your needs.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
• Extensive use of the programming, learning and  
configuration functions of the remote may consume  
significantly more battery power than normal remote  
operation. While the batteries should last for four to  
six months in normal operation, you may find that  
they need to be changed sooner after the remote is  
programmed for the first time.  
• When the batteries approach a level below which  
the remote will not function, the remote’s LCD  
screen will display a LOW BATTERY warning,  
as shown in Figure 91. We strongly recommend  
replacing the batteries as soon as this message  
appears to avoid the loss of programming and  
configuration settings. These settings are not lost  
wh
A
en
V
R
the batteries are changed quickly.  
L O W
 
B A T T E R Y  
Figure 91  
56 CONFIGURING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
Unit does not function when Main  
Power Switch is pushed  
• No AC Power  
• Make certain that AC power cord firmly connected to the AC Power Cord  
Socket I and is plugged into a live outlet  
• Check to see whether outlet is switch-controlled  
Display lights, but there is no sound  
or picture  
• Intermittent input connections  
• Make certain that all input and speaker connections  
are secure  
Mute is on  
• Press Mute Button iß  
• Volume control is down  
• Turn up volume control  
Unit turns on, but front-panel  
display does not light up  
• Display brightness is turned off  
• Follow the instructions in the Dim and Display Brightness sections  
on pages 41 and 42 so that the display is set to VFD FULL  
No sound from any speaker;  
light around power switch is red  
• Amplifier is in protection mode  
due to possible short  
• Check speaker wire connections for shorts at receiver and  
speaker ends  
• Amplifier is in protection mode  
due to internal problems  
• Contact your local Harman Kardon service center  
No sound from surround or  
center speakers  
• Incorrect surround mode  
• Input is monaural  
• Incorrect configuration  
• Stereo or Mono program material  
• Select a mode other than Stereo  
• There is no surround information from mono sources  
• Check speaker mode configuration  
• The surround decoder may not create center- or rear-channel  
information from nonencoded programs  
Unit does not respond to  
remote commands  
• Weak batteries in remote  
• Wrong device selected  
• Remote sensor is obscured  
• Change remote batteries  
• Press the AVR selector  
• Make certain front-panel sensor is visible to remote  
or connect remote sensor  
Intermittent buzzing in tuner  
• Local interference  
• Move unit or antenna away from computers, fluorescent  
lights, motors or other electrical appliances  
Letters flash in the channel indicator  
display and digital audio stops  
• Digital audio feed paused  
• Additional cooling may not be required  
• Resume play for DVD  
• Check that Digital Input is selected  
Fan does not appear to operate  
• The fan is activated only when additional cooling is required due to  
high internal temperature, it is normal for the fan to be inactive at  
normal volume levels  
In addition to the items shown above, additional information on troubleshooting possible problems with your AVR 445, or installation-related issues, may be found in the list of  
Standby mode by pressing the Standby/On Switch  
1. Next, press and hold the Surround Mode Group  
Selector 2 and the Tuning Mode Selector 8  
buttons for 3 seconds.  
If the system is still operating incorrectly, there may  
have been an electronic discharge or severe AC line  
interference that has corrupted the memory or  
microprocessor.  
Processor Reset  
In the rare case where the unit’s operation or the dis-  
plays seem abnormal, the cause may involve the erratic  
operation of the system’s memory or microprocessor.  
The unit will turn on automatically and display the  
RESETmessage in the Upper Display Line #.  
If these steps do not solve the problem, consult an  
authorized Harman Kardon service center.  
To correct this problem, first unplug the unit from the  
AC wall outlet and wait at least 3 minutes. After the  
pause, reconnect the AC power cord and check the  
unit’s operation. If the system still malfunctions, a  
system reset may clear the problem.  
NOTE: Resetting the processor will erase any configu-  
ration settings you have made for speakers, output  
levels, surround modes, and digital input assignments,  
as well as the tuner presets. After a reset, the unit will  
be returned to the factory presets, and all settings for  
these items must be reentered.  
To clear the AVR 445’s entire system memory includ-  
ing tuner presets, output level settings, delay times and  
speaker configuration data, first put the unit in the  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
Surround Mode Chart  
MODE  
FEATURES  
Dolby Digital  
Available only with digital input sources encoded with Dolby Digital data. It provides up to five separate main audio channels and  
a special dedicated low-frequency effects channel.  
Dolby Digital EX  
DTS 5.1  
Available when the receiver is configured for 6.1/7.1-channel operation, Dolby Digital EX is the latest version of Dolby Digital. When used with  
movies or other programs that have special encoding, Dolby Digital EX reproduces specially encoded soundtracks so that a full 6.1/7.1 sound  
field is available. Even if a source does not contain specific EX encoding, the special algorithms may be used to derive a 6.1/7.1 output.  
When the speaker configuration is set for 5.1-channel operation, the DTS 5.1 mode is available when DVD, audio-only music or laser discs encoded  
with DTS data are played. DTS 5.1 provides up to five separate main audio channels and a special dedicated low-frequency channel.  
DTS-ES 6.1 Matrix  
DTS-ES 6.1 Discrete  
When the speaker configuration is set for 6.1/7.1 operation, playback of a DTS-encoded program source will automatically trigger the selection  
of one of the two DTS-ES modes. Newer discs with special DTS-ES discrete encoding will be decoded to provide six discrete, full-bandwidth  
channels plus a separate low-frequency channel. All other DTS discs will be decoded using the DTS-ES Matrix mode, which creates a 6.1-channel  
sound field from the original 5.1-channel soundtrack.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Movie  
Music  
Game  
Pro Logic  
Dolby Pro Logic II decodes full-range, discrete, left, center right, right surround and left surround channels from either matrix surround-encoded  
programs and conventional stereo sources when an analog input is in use. The Dolby Pro Logic II Movie mode is optimized for movie soundtracks,  
while the Pro Logic II Music mode should be used with musical selections. The Pro Logic II Game mode is designed to enhance the soundtrack  
of video games from either dedicated consoles or computers.The Pro Logic mode re-creates original Pro Logic processing for those who  
prefer that presentation.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Movie  
Music  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is the latest extension of Dolby Laboratory’s benchmark matrix surround technology which creates a discrete 7.1 sound field from  
matrix surround or two-channel stereo sources when your system is configured for surround back speakers. Movie, Music and Game versions are  
available that customize the processing to the type of source in use. These modes may also be used to create 7.1 sound fields from 5.1 digital  
soundtracks.  
Game  
Logic 7 Cinema  
Logic 7 Music  
Exclusive to Harman Kardon for A/V receivers, Logic 7 is an advanced mode that extracts the maximum surround information from either  
surround-encoded programs or conventional stereo material. When your system has been configured for use with Surround Back speakers  
(see page 41), you may choose between either 7.1 or 5.1 versions of the Logic 7 modes, while only the 5.1 versions are available when  
there are no Surround Back speakers. The Logic 7 C (or Cinema) mode should be used with any source that contains Dolby Surround or similar  
matrix encoding. Logic 7 C delivers increased center channel intelligibility, and more accurate placement of sounds with fades and pans. The  
Logic 7 M (or Music) mode enhances the listening experience by presenting a wider front soundstage and greater rear ambience. Both Logic 7  
modes also direct low-frequency information to the subwoofer (if installed and configured) to deliver maximum bass impact. Logic 7 adds  
additional bass enhancement that circulates low frequencies in the 40Hz to 120Hz range to the front and surround speakers to deliver a less  
localized soundstage that seems broader and wider than when the subwoofer is the sole source of bass energy. Logic 7/7 may also be used  
to add surround back channels to many 5.1 digital soundtracks.  
DTS Neo:6 Cinema  
DTS Neo:6 Music  
These two modes are available when any analog source is playing to create a three-channel, five-channel or six-channel surround presentation from  
conventional Matrix-encoded and traditional Stereo sources. Select the Cinema version of Neo:6 when a program with any type of analog Matrix  
surround encoding is present. Select the Music version of Neo:6 for optimal processing when a nonencoded, two-channel stereo program is  
being played.  
DTS 96/24  
DTS 96/24 is available on specially encoded (and labeled) optical discs that offer five channels of audio with a 96kHz sampling rate that delivers  
greatly improved audio performance. When a DTS 96/24 disc is in use and the player is connected with a digital link, this mode is selected  
automatically.  
Theater  
The Theater mode creates a sound field that resembles the acoustic feeling of a standard live-performance theater.  
The two Hall modes create sound fields that resemble a small- (Hall 1) or medium-sized (Hall 2) concert hall.  
Hall 1, Hall 2  
Dolby Virtual Speaker  
Reference  
Wide  
Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses a next-generation advanced algorithm to reproduce the dynamics and surround sound effects of a precisely  
placed 5.1-channel speaker system using only front left and right speakers. In the Reference mode, the apparent width of the sound across the front  
image is defined by the distance between the two speakers. The Wide mode provides a wider, more spacious front image when the two speakers are  
close together. Depending on the number of speakers available in your system, a variety of different sound field options are available for both the  
Reference and Wide modes.  
5-Channel Stereo  
7-Channel Stereo  
This mode takes advantage of multiple speakers to place a stereo signal at both the front and back of a room. Depending on whether the AVR  
has been configured for either 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 operation, one of these modes, but not both, is available at any time. Ideal for playing music in  
situations such as a party, it places the same signal at the front-left and surround-left, and front-right and surround-right speakers.  
The center channel is fed a summed mono mix of the in-phase material of the left and right channels.  
Surround  
This mode turns off all surround processing and presents the pure left- and right-channel presentation of two-channel stereo programs.  
Off (Stereo)  
Dolby Headphone (DH) Dolby Headphone enables ordinary stereo headphones to portray the sound of a five-speaker surround-playback system.  
58 APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
SYSTEM DEFAULTS  
The two tables in this section show the factory default settings for all inputs to give you a picture of the AVR 445’s initial settings. You may then decide whether any item needs  
to be changed so that it is more appropriate for your specific installation. Any of the settings shown may be changed as shown in the pages of the System Configuration section  
of this manual (pages 20–33).  
TABLE 1: INPUT DEFAULTS  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO INPUT  
RECORD  
OUTPUT  
Video 1  
Video 2  
Video 3  
Video 4  
DVD  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
OPTICAL 1  
ANALOG  
COAX 1  
OPTICAL 3  
COAX 3  
ANALOG  
---  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
OFF  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
OFF  
COMPONENT 1  
ANALOG  
COMPONENT 2  
ANALOG  
COMPONENT 3  
ANALOG  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
Tuner  
---  
DSP DOWNMIX  
DSP DOWNMIX  
ANALOG  
---  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
XM  
ANALOG  
CD  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
---  
ANALOG  
Tape  
ANALOG  
DMP/The Bridge  
6/8 CH Direct  
USB  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
DSP DOWNMIX  
System Default and Personal Settings Worksheets  
The worksheets in this section show the system defaults for the global settings on your AVR 445. Once your system is configured manually, or through the use of EzSet/EQ II,  
where applicable, we recommend that you use the “Your System Settings” column to record your personal preferences so that they may be restored in the event the AVR’s  
memory is lost due to an extended power outage, system upgrade, processor reset, or other major service to your unit. Additional copies of this worksheet may be downloaded  
Worksheet A: Surround Configuration Defaults and Settings  
Feature  
System Default  
Your System Settings  
Logic 7 Global  
Off  
Original  
3
Default Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music Center Width  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music Dimension  
Dolby Pro Logic II Panorama  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music Center Width  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music Dimension  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Panorama  
Night Mode  
0
Off  
3
0
Off  
Off  
APPENDIX 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
System Default and Personal Settings Worksheets  
Worksheet B: Delay Defaults and Setting  
Feature  
System Default  
Your System Settings  
Front Left  
12.0 Feet  
12.0 Feet  
12.0 Feet  
10.0 Feet  
10.0 Feet  
10.0 Feet  
10.0 Feet  
12.0 Feet  
Center  
Front Right  
Surround Right  
Surround Back Right  
Surround Back Left  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
Worksheet C: System Defaults and Settings  
Feature  
System Default  
Your System Settings  
Front L/R Speaker Size & X-Over  
Center Speaker Size & X-Over  
Surround L/R Speaker Size & X-Over  
Surround Back Speaker Size & X-Over  
LFE LP Filter  
Small – 100Hz  
Small – 100Hz  
Small – 100Hz  
None  
100Hz  
Sub Mode  
Channel Adjust  
Sub Size  
Sub  
Global  
10 in/250mm  
Off  
VFD Fade Time Out  
VFD Brightness  
Volume Default  
Volume Default Set  
Semi-OSD Time Out  
Full-OSD Time Out  
DMP Auto Power  
Surround Back Amps  
Carrier Out  
Full  
Off  
–25dB  
5 Sec  
20 Sec  
Off  
Main  
Zone II  
60 APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
APPENDIX 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVR 445 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
Audio Section  
Stereo Mode  
AM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range  
520–1720kHz  
45dB  
Loop 500µV  
1kHz, 50% Mod 0.8%  
10kHz, 30dB  
Continuous Average Power (FTC)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Usable Sensitivity  
Distortion  
80 Watts per channel, 20Hz–20kHz,  
@ <0.07% THD, both channels driven into 8 ohms  
Selectivity  
Seven-Channel Surround Modes  
Power per Individual Channel  
Video Section  
Front L & R channels:  
65 Watts per channel  
@ <0.07% THD, 20Hz–20kHz into 8 ohms  
Television Format  
NTSC  
1V p-p/75 ohms  
1V p-p/75 ohms  
Input Level/Impedance  
Output Level/Impedance  
Video Frequency Response  
(Composite and S-Video)  
Center channel:  
65 Watts @ <0.07% THD, 20Hz–20kHz into 8 ohms  
10Hz–8MHz (–3dB)  
10Hz–60MHz (–3dB)  
Video Frequency Response  
(Component Video)  
Surround (L & R Side, L & R back) channels:  
65 Watts per channel  
@ <0.07% THD, 20Hz–20kHz into 8 ohms  
General  
Input Sensitivity/Impedance  
Linear (High-Level)  
200mV/47k ohms  
100dB  
Power Requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 120V/60Hz  
120W at Power On, idle; 1,025W at rated power output  
(7 channels driven)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A)  
Surround System Adjacent Channel Separation  
Dimensions  
Width  
Height  
Depth  
Weight  
Product  
17-5/16 inches (440mm) 20-1/16 inches (510mm)  
6-1/2 inches (165mm) 10 inches (254mm)  
17-1/16 inches (435mm) 22-3/16 inches (565mm)  
39 lb (17.7kg) 46 lb (20.9kg)  
Shipping  
Dolby Pro Logic  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
40dB  
55dB  
55dB  
Frequency Response  
@ 1W (+0dB, –3dB)  
10Hz 130kHz  
40 Amps  
Depth measurement includes knobs, buttons and terminal connections.  
Height measurement includes feet and chassis.  
All features and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
High Instantaneous  
Current Capability (HCC)  
Harman Kardon, Harman International and Logic 7 are registered trademarks of  
Harman International Industries, Incorporated.  
Transient Intermodulation  
Distortion (TIM)  
Unmeasurable  
40V/µsec  
TM  
The  
Bridge  
and  
are trademarks of Harman International Industries, Incorporated.  
Slew Rate  
Dolby, Pro Logic and the Double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
DTS, DTS Surround, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 and DTS Neo:6 are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
A-BUS and A-BUS/READY are registered trademarks of Leisure Tech Electronics Pty Ltd Australia.  
SACD is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
HD-DVD is a trademark of the DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation (DVD FLLC).  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks  
of HDMI Licensing, LLC.  
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States and other countries.  
FM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range  
Usable Sensitivity  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Distortion  
87.5108.0MHz  
IHF 1.3µV/13.2dBf  
Mono/Stereo 70/68dB  
Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3%  
40dB @ 1kHz  
400kHz, 70dB  
80dB  
Stereo Separation  
Selectivity  
Image Rejection  
IF Rejection  
90dB  
XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.  
RealPlayer is a registered trademark of RealNetworks.  
Winamp is a registered trademark of America Online, Inc.  
TiVo is a registered trademark of TiVo Inc.  
Supplied Accessories  
The AVR 445 is supplied with the following accessory items. If any  
item is missing, please contact Harman Kardon customer service  
• Six AAA batteries  
• System remote control  
• ZR 10 remote control  
• Extender rod for microphone  
• AM loop antenna  
• FM wire antenna  
microphone  
• AC power cord  
to be notified about our new products and/or special promotions.  
62 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250 Crossways Park Drive, Woodbury, New York 11797  
© 2006 Harman International Industries, Incorporated. All rights reserved.  
Part No. ZKD3101HA00  
®
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grizzly Drill G0514XF User Manual
Hotpoint Clothes Dryer TCAL User Manual
Hotpoint Refrigerator RLS 175 x RLS 150 x RLFM 151 x RLFM 171 x User Manual
Hotpoint Washer AQXGF 149 PM User Manual
Hotpoint Washer Dryer WMUD 10637 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Computer Drive USB Floppy Drive Key User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Laptop 397381 001 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Personal Computer AT496AV CTO User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Refrigerator dx2100 MT User Manual
Hyundai IT Car Video System L72S User Manual